U. Electric Solenoid Operated Pneumatic (EP) Valve: EP valves three part operation - common, normally open, and normally closed; rated for 25 PSIG when used in control system operation at 20 PSIG or less or rated at 150 PSIG when used in control system operation from 25 to 100 PSIG.
V. Electro-Pneumatic (E/P) Transducers: Electronic/pneumatic transducer provides proportional 3 to 15 PSIG output signal from either 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC analog control input. E/P transducer equipped with following features:
1. Separate Span and Zero Adjustments
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 600
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-21
2. Manual Output Adjustments
3. Pressure Gauge Assembly
4. Feedback Loop Control
5. Air Consumption of 0.05 L/s (0.1 scfm) at Mid-Range
W. End Switches: Turret head Type SPDT. Schneider Electric/Square D Class 9007, Type C54B2, or approved equivalent.
2.12 WIRING AND RACEWAYS
A. General: Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in applicable Sections of Division 26, Electrical.
B. Insulated wire to be copper conductors, UL labeled for 90 degrees C minimum service.
C. Field panels and controllers to be supplied by building emergency power system where systems being monitored or controlled are on emergency power.
D. Run control wiring as follows:
1. Mechanical Rooms: In conduit.
2. Exposed in Building Spaces: In conduit.
3. Concealed in Building Walls and Ceilings: Plenum rated cable.
4. Concealed in Building Ceilings: Plenum rated cable in cable tray.
E. Field and Subfield Panels: Voltage in panels not-to-exceed 120 volts.
F. Motor Control Centers: Responsibility for correct voltage of holding coils and starter wiring in pre-wired motor control centers interfacing with automatic controls is included hereunder.
G. Wiring for BAS systems communications buses two conductor minimum 18 gauge foil-shielded, stranded twisted pair cable rated at 300 VDC or more than 80 degrees C.
2.13 SMOKE DETECTION (FOR PROJECTS WITH A FIRE ALARM SYSTEM) A. See Division 28 for Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. Terminal Devices: Remove terminal sensors, actuators and controls as indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate scope of mechanical work shown on drawings and described in specifications. Remove pneumatic piping and cap with hardware as appropriate. Remove wiring and conduit associated with devices. Do not leave any unused abandoned piping or wiring in space. Remove pneumatic piping, wiring and conduits, including all appurtenances back to the main.
B. Graphics and Programming: Remove symbols from control system graphics associated with deleted terminal elements. Modify programming code to delete alarms, control loops, etc., associated with deleted terminal devices.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 601
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-22
B. Notify the Owner's Authorized Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
C. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.
3.3 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING
A. Testing completed before Owner's Authorized Representative is notified of system demonstration.
B. Calibrate and prepare for service of instruments, controls, and accessory equipment furnished under this specification.
C. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults.
D. Enable control systems and verify calibration and operation of input and output devices.
E. Verify that system operation adheres to sequences of operation.
F. Commissioning and Verification: In addition to commissioning requirements specified elsewhere, provide the following commissioning on the HVAC instrumentation and controls system:
1. Control systems completely commissioned to ensure aspects of the system are operating as intended and at optimum tuning.
2. Wiring connections verified and traced from field device to panel to ensure proper connections.
3. Measured values verified by a hand held calibrated device to validate that value indicated by the control system is in fact the actual measured value.
4. Loops properly tuned to obtain the desired control value. Each loop to be "upset" and put back in control to demonstrate its ability to stabilize quickly.
5. Provide a final point-by-point report submitted that indicates the date of each verification, the results, and initialed on each page by the person performing the reading.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND TRAINING
A. Site Testing:
1. Contractor provides personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform testing. Owner or Owner's Authorized Representative will witness and sign off on acceptance testing.
2. Contractor demonstrates compliance of completed control system with Contract Documents. Using approved test plan, physical and functional requirements of project demonstrated.
B. Training:
1. General: Contractor conducts training courses for up to three other designated personnel in operation and maintenance of system. Training manuals provided for each trainee, with two additional copies provided for archival at project site. Manuals include detailed description of subject matter for each lesson. Copies of audiovisuals delivered to Owner.
Training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction, including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunch time, Monday through Friday, during normal first shift in effect at training facility. Notification of any planned training given to Owner's Authorized Representative at least 15 days prior to training.
2. Operator's Training I: First course taught at supplier's facility for period of one training day. Upon completion, each student should be able to perform elementary operations with guidance and describe general hardware architecture and functionality of system.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 602
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-23
3. Operator's Training II: Second course taught at project site for a period of one training day after completion of contractor's field testing. Course includes instruction on specific hardware configuration of installed system and specific instructions for operating installed system. Upon completion, each student should be able to start system, operate the system, recover system after failure, and describe specific hardware architecture and operation of system.
4. Operator's Training III: Third course taught at project site for period of one training day no later than six months after completion of the acceptance test. Course will be structured to address specific topics that students need to discuss and to answer questions concerning operation of system. Upon completion, students should be fully proficient in system operation and have no unanswered questions regarding operation of installed system.
3.5 COMMUNICATION WIRING
A. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for communication cabling.
B. Verify integrity of network following cable installation.
C. Communication wiring unspliced length when that length is commercially available; labeled to indicate origination and destination data.
D. Grounding of coaxial cable in accordance with NEC regulations article on “Communications Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding.”
3.6 WIRING AND RACEWAYS
A. Provide electrical wiring required to control systems specified in this Section. Control and interlock wiring complies with national, state and local electrical codes and Division 26, Electrical of this specification.
B. Power wiring required for building control panel(s) to be dedicated circuit(s).
C. Verify location of operator work station with Owner prior to installation.
D. NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring UL Listed in approved raceway according to NEC and Division 26, Electrical requirements.
E. Low-voltage wiring meets NEC Class 2 requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits subfused when required to meet Class 2 current limit.)
F. Where NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires are in concealed and accessible locations, including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that cables are UL listed for intended application.
G. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-voltage wiring except for purpose of interfacing (e.g., relays and transformers).
H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring run parallel along surface or perpendicular to it and tied at 10 foot intervals.
I. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, support from structural members. Do not support cables with ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 603
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-24
J. Make wire-to-device connections at terminal block or terminal strip. Make wire-to-wire connections at terminal block.
K. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring 24 V. If only higher voltages are available, provide step-down transformers.
L. Wiring installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between termination points.
M. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at penetrations.
N. Include one pull string in each raceway 1-inch or larger.
O. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures. Enclosures include packaged equipment control panels unless they also contain Class 1 starters.
P. Install raceway to maintain a minimum clearance of 6-inches from high-temperature equipment (e.g., steam pipes or flues).
Q. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct strap or tie rods.
Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.
R. Install insulated bushings on raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top end of vertical raceways.
S. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways not-to-exceed 3-feet in length and be supported at each end. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways to be used.
T. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections joined with couplings. Terminations made with fittings at boxes.
U. Input and output terminations to be labeled at the controller to identify if they are AI, DI, AO, DO, and function (i.e. pump start, OM Sensor).
3.7 INSTALLATION OF AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A. General:
1. Install sensors and thermostats in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Room sensors and thermostats installed at 48-inches AFF to top of sensor on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall framing at the locations shown on the Drawings.
3. Low-limit sensors used in mixing plenums installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct.
4. Pipe-mounted temperature sensors installed in wells with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.
5. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north facing wall or screen, complete with sun shield at designated location.
6. Chiller or Heat Pump differential pressure sensor: Locate immediately at the chiller or heat pump piping connections, before any fittings or accessories.
B. Flow Switch: Use correct paddle for pipe diameter. Adjust flow switch in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 604
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-25
C. Actuators:
1. General:
a. Mount and link control damper actuators according to manufacturer's instructions. b. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.
2. Actuator Mounting for Damper and Valve Arrangements to Comply with the Following:
a. Damper Actuators: Do not install in the air stream.
b. Use a weather proof enclosure (clear and see through) if actuators are located outside.
c. Damper or valve actuator ambient temperature not-to-exceed 122 degrees F through any combination of medium temperature or surrounding air. Provide appropriate air gaps, thermal isolation washers or spacers, standoff legs, or insulation as necessary. Mount per manufacturer's recommendations. d. Actuator cords or conduit to incorporate a drip leg if condensation is possible. Do not allow water to contact actuator or internal parts. Location of conduits in temperatures dropping below dew point to be avoided to prevent water from condensing in conduit and running into actuator.
e. Damper mounting arrangements to comply with the following:
1) Furnish and install damper channel supports and sheet metal collars. 2) Jack shafting of damper sections not allowed.
3) Multi-section dampers arranged so that each damper section operates individually. Provide one electronic actuator direct shaft mounted per section.
f. Size damper sections based on actuator manufacturers specific recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. In general: Damper section not-to-exceed 24 ft-sq. with face velocity 1500 FPM.
g. Multiple section dampers of two or more arranged to allow actuators to be direct shaft mounted on the outside of the duct.
h. Multiple section dampers of three or more sections wide arranged with a 3-sided vertical channel (8-inch wide by 6-inch deep) within the duct or fan housing and between adjacent damper sections. Vertical channel anchored at the top and bottom to the fan housing or building structure for support. Connect sides of each damper frame to the channels. Holes in the channel to allow damper drive blade shafts to pass through channel for direct shaft mounting of actuators. Face open side of channel downstream of the airflow, except for exhaust air dampers. i. Multiple section dampers to be mounted flush within a wall or housing opening to receive either vertical channel supports as described above or sheet metal standout collars. Sheet metal collars (12-inch minimum) to bring each damper section out of the wall to allow direct shaft mounting of the actuator on the side of the collar.
D. Control Valve:
1. Valves installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Slip-stem control valves installed so that stem position is not more than 60 degrees from vertical up position. Ball type control valves installed with stem in horizontal position.
3. Control valves accessible and serviceable.
4. Install isolation valves so that control valve may be serviced without draining supply/return side piping system. Install unions at connections to screw-type control valves.
5. Valve Sizing for Water Coil:
a. On/Off Control Valves: Line size.
b. Modulating control valve body size may be reduced, at most, two pipe sizes from the line size or not less than 1/2 the pipe size. BAS contractor to size water coil control valves for the application as follows:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 605
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-26
1) Booster-heat valves sized not-to-exceed 4-9 PSI differential pressure. Size valve for 50 percent valve authority. Valve design pressure drop is equal to the sum of coil drop plus the balance valve drop.
2) Primary valves sized not-to-exceed 5-15 PSI differential pressure. Size valve for 50 percent valve authority. Valve design pressure drop is equal to the sum of coil drop plus the balance valve drop.
3) Butterfly valves sized for modulating service at 60 to 70 degree rotation.
Design velocity 12-feet per second or less when used with standard EPDM seats.
c. Valve Mounting Arrangements to Comply with the Following:
1) Provide unions on ports of two-way and three-way valves. 2) Install three-way equal percentage Characterized Control valves in a mixing configuration with the “A” port piped to the coil.
3) Install 2-1/2-inch and above, three-way globe valves, as manufactured for mixing or diverting service to the coil.
E. Control Damper:
1. Dampers installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unless specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.
2. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.
F. Air Flow Station: Install where indicated in ductwork and/or equipment with manufacturer's recommended straight ductwork upstream and downstream of air flow station or as shown on drawings, whichever is greater. Where equipment manufacturer's standard airflow measuring station cannot read airflows at required design velocities, provide appropriate air flow measuring station to provide accurate reading throughout system design operations range.
3.8 SMOKE DETECTION (FOR PROJECTS WITH A FIRE ALARM SYSTEM) A. Smoke detector furnished and powered/wired under Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security.
Coordinate with fire alarm equipment supplier. Installation of duct smoke detector housing and sampling tube under Division 23, HVAC.
B. Install smoke detectors in return air systems greater than 2000 CFM.
C. Install smoke detectors at each story prior to connection to return air riser in systems greater than 15,000 CFM and serving more than one story.
3.9 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION AND POINTS LISTS
A. Where local energy code dictates certain sequences (such as night setback, night flush, pressure and temperature reset, terminal unit sequences, etc.), the sequences are not necessarily repeated in the documents. It is not the intent of this specification or documentation to reiterate the energy code. Provide energy code mandated sequences and document in sequence of operations submittals at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide required points to achieve the appropriate sequences.
B. See control diagrams and sequences on drawings.
C. Variable Frequency Drives: For a VFD dependent on an external input for its output setting (e.g., the VFD gets “Frequency” as an input), loss of that external input to result in the VFD holding its last value. If the VFD is running its own PID loop and the external input to the VFD is October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 606
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-27
a setpoint (e.g. duct static pressure setpoint), the VFD to hold the last setpoint. If the VFD loses its process variable (e.g. duct static pressure), the VFD to go to its minimum speed setting.
D. Except as specified otherwise, throttling ranges, proportional bands, and cycle differentials to be centered on the associated setpoint. Modulating feedback control loops to include the capability of having proportional, integral, and derivative action. Unless the loop is specified “proportional only” or “P+I”, Contractor to apply appropriate elements of integral and derivative gain to each control loop to result in stable operation, minimum settling time and maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance.
E. Provide a real time clock and schedule controller with sufficient scheduling capability to schedule required controllers and sequences. Schedule functionality may reside in a controller.
If a controller is used, document scheduling functionality including names and types on controller points list submittal. Set up initial schedules in coordination with Owner.
F. Scheduling Terminology: When air handlers are scheduled throughout the day, the following defines the terminology used:
1. Occupied Period: Period of time when the building is in use and occupied. Confirm schedule with Owner. Exclude all national holidays. Generally systems will be fully operational throughout this period and ventilation air to be continuously introduced.
Space temperature setpoints will generally be in the “normal” range of 68 degrees to 78 degrees F.
2. Unoccupied period: Period of time when the building or zone is not in use and unoccupied. Ventilation air not to be introduced.
3. Preoccupancy Period: Time prior to the Occupied period when the systems are returning the space temperatures from setback to “normal” or occupied setpoints (warm-up and cool-down). Ventilation air shall not be introduced unless outside air conditions permit free-cooling or to support a pre-occupancy purge sequence. Time period to be determined by an optimum start strategy unless otherwise specified.
4. Setback Period: Setback will typically start with the end of the occupied period and end with the start of the preoccupancy period, however it shall be provided with its own schedule. Generally systems will be off except to maintain a “setback” temperature, economization may be enabled to maintain “setback” cooling setpoint when applicable.
G. Where any sequence or occupancy schedule calls for more than one motorized unit to start simultaneously, the BAS start commands to be staggered by 5 second (adj.) intervals to minimize inrush current.
H. Wherever a value is indicated as adjustable (adj.), it shall be modifiable, with the proper password level. For these points, it is unacceptable to have to modify programming statements to change the setpoint.
I. When a power failure is detected in any phase, the BAS start commands to be retracted immediately from electrically powered units served by the failed power source. If the associated controller is powered by normal or emergency power, it may monitor its own power source as an indication of power status. If the controller is powered by uninterruptible power supply (UPS), or if it is not capable of monitoring its own power for use in sequences, provide at least one voltage monitor (three phase when applicable) per building. When the BAS detects that normal or emergency power has been restored, all equipment for which the BAS start command had been retracted to be automatically restarted in an orderly manner on staggered 5 second intervals to minimize inrush current.
J. Where reset action is specified in a sequence of operation, but a reset schedule is not indicated on the drawings, employ one of the following methods:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 607
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-28
1. Determine a fixed reset schedule to result in stable operation and maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance.
2. Use a floating reset algorithm which increments the secondary variable setpoint (setpoint of control loop being reset) on a periodic basis to maintain primary variable setpoint. The recalculation time and reset increment to be chosen to maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance.
3. Primary variable to control the devices directly using a PID feedback control loop without resetting the secondary variable. However, the control devices to still modulate as necessary to maintain upper and lower limits on the secondary variable. Proportional band, integral gain, and derivative term to be selected to maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable tolerance while minimizing overshoot and settling time. Gain prior approval for implementing this method of reset.
K. Where a supply air temperature or duct pressure setpoint is specified to be reset by the space temperature of the zones calling for the most cooling/heating, employ the following method:
1. Use a floating reset algorithm which increments the secondary variable (e.g., supply air temperature or duct pressure) setpoint on a periodic basis to maintain primary variable (e.g., space temperature) setpoint. The reset increment to be determined by the quantity of “need heat” or “need cool” requests from individual SCU's. A SCU's “need heat” virtual point to activate whenever the zone's space temperature falls below the currently applicable (occupied or unoccupied) heating setpoint throttling range. A SCU's “need cool” virtual point to activate whenever the zone's space temperature rises above the currently applicable (occupied, unoccupied, or economy) cooling setpoint throttling range.
The recalculation time and reset increment to be chosen to maintain the primary variable within the specified maximum allowable variance while minimizing overshoot and settling time. Reset range maximum and minimum values to limit the setpoint range.
L. Where a supply air temperature, duct pressure, or differential water pressure setpoint is specified to be reset by valve or damper position of the zone or zones calling for the most cooling/heating, the following method to be employed:
1. A floating reset algorithm to be used which increments the secondary variable (e.g., supply air temperature, pipe or duct pressure) setpoint on a periodic basis to maintain primary variable (e.g., cooling valve, heating valve, damper position) setpoint of 85 percent open. The reset increment to be calculated based on the average position of the quantity of the worst (most open valve/damper) zone(s) as specified. The recalculation time, reset increment and control device position influence to be chosen to maintain the primal variable within the specified maximum allowable variance while overshoot and settling time. The BAS analog output value to be acceptable as indicating the position of the control device.
2. Alternatively to continuously calculating the average of the quantity of worst valve/damper positions, a method similar to the one described above may be employed whereby the “need heat” or “need cool” virtual point to increment by one unit each time a zone's valve/damper position rises to greater than 95 percent. The quantity of “need heat” or “need cool” points to then be the basis for reset.
M. Where “prove operation” of a device (generally controlled by a digital output) is indicated in the sequence, it shall require that the BAS, after an adjustable time delay after the device is commanded to operate (feedback delay), confirm that the device is operational via the status input. If the status point does not confirm operation after the time delay or anytime thereafter for an adjustable time delay (debounce delay) while the device is commanded to run, an alarm to be enunciated audibly. Upon failure, run command to be removed and the device to be locked out until the alarm is manually acknowledged unless specified otherwise.
N. BAS to provide for adjustable maximum rates of change for increasing and decreasing output from the following analog output points:
1. Speed control of variable speed drives
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 608
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS 23 09 00-29
2. Control Reset Loop
3. Valve Travel Limit
O. Wherever a value is indicated to be dependent on another value (i.e., setpoint plus 5 degrees F) BAS to use that equation to determine the value. Simply providing a virtual point that the operator must set is unacceptable. In this case three virtual points to be provided. One to store the parameter (5 degrees F), one to store the setpoint, and one to store the value which is the result of the equation.
P. Trend points as identified in the points list. Trends to be grouped system specific and setup in two-axis (x,y) graphical format that display object values relative to time. Setup trends to record data in 5 minute increments.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 609
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC PIPING 23 21 13-1
SECTION 23 21 13
HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Hydronic Piping, Above Grade
2. Unions
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
2. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
3. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at project site.
4. Grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties: Show grooved joint couplings and fittings on Shop Drawings and product submittals, and specifically identify with the applicable coupling style number.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this Section, with documented experience.
2. Welder Qualifications: Certify in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
3. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Provide safety valves and pressure vessels with the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 01.
4. Grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties: Provide all grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialty products from a single manufacturer. Utilize only grooving tools from the same manufacturer as the grooved components. Date-stamp all castings October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 610
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC PIPING 23 21 13-2
used for couplings housings, fittings, or valve and specialty bodies for quality assurance and traceability.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HYDRONIC PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe:
1. Sizes 10-inches and Under: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black, Type E (electric resistance welded), Grade B.
a. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type.
b. Wrought Cast and Forged Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5 including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1) Material Group: 1.1.
2) End Connections: Butt welding.
3) Facings: Raised face.
c. Joints: Threaded or AWS D1.1 welded.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.
2. Joints: Solder, lead free ASTM B32, HB alloy (95-5 tin antimony), or tin and silver.
3. Joints: Brazed, AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-36, non-cadmium silver alloy. Pipes 2-1/2- inches or larger or piping routed over food preparation centers, food serving facilities, food storage areas, computer rooms, telecommunications rooms, or electrical rooms.
2.2 UNIONS
A. Unions for Pipe 2-inches and Under:
1. Ferrous Piping: 150, 250, and 300 PSIG malleable iron, threaded, ASME B16.39.
2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints, ASME B16.22.
B. Dielectric Connections: Provide dielectric waterway or brass nipple fitting with threaded ends.
Dielectric unions are not allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install per manufacturer's written instructions and requirements.
B. Install hydronic piping in accordance with the following:
Above Grade Below Grade Preinsulated Pipe Below Grade Uninsulated Piping
Service W/
S
G
C
C
u
St
l
C
u
PE
X
PV
C
HDP
E
Stl Cu PV
C
HDP
E
Heatin
g Hot
Water
X X X N/A N/
A
N/
A
N/A N/A
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 611
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC PIPING 23 21 13-3
1. Key:
a. W/S = Welded/Screwed Steel
b. GC = Grooved Coupling Steel
c. Cu = Copper
d. Stl = Steel
C. Preparation:
1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
2. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
4. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.
D. Above Grade Piping Installation:
1. Install per manufacturer's written instructions and requirements.
2. Install heating water, glycol, condenser water, piping to ASME B31.9 requirements. Install chilled water piping to ASME B31.5 requirements.
3. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
4. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interference with use of space.
5. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
6. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors allowing adequate space for pipe insulation.
7. Slope piping at 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow and arrange to drain at low points.
8. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
9. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
10. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily show top connections in all cases.
Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main, with takeoff coming out of the top unless trade coordination conditions preclude it.
11. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
12. Inserts:
a. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
b. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
c. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4-inches.
d. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. e. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
13. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
a. Install in accordance with Section 23 05 29, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment.
b. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
c. Place hangers within 12-inches of each horizontal elbow. d. Use hangers with 1-1/2-inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
e. Support vertical piping at top, bottom, and not less than every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 612
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC PIPING 23 21 13-4
f. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.
g. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting.
h. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. i. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
14. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
15. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
16. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.
17. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
18. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting.
E. Field Quality Control:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, provide closure capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
6. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
a. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
b. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid. c. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of water.
d. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure not-to-exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
e. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least four hours, examine piping, joints and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. f. Prepare written report of testing.
F. Flushing and Cleaning of Piping Systems:
1. Clean piping systems thoroughly. Purge pipe of construction debris and contamination before placing the piping systems in service. Provide temporary connections for cleaning, purging, and circulating fluids through the piping system.
2. Use temporary strainers and temporary pumps that can create a minimum fluid velocity of 6-feet per second and maximum of 10-feet per second to flush and clean the piping systems. Do not use Owner's permanent strainers to trap debris during pipe flushing operations. Fit the temporary construction strainers with a line size blowoff valve.
3. When constructing minor piping modifications or additions, verify with Owner if the Owner's pumps and strainers can be used for flushing and chemical cleaning operations.
When the flushing and cleaning operations are complete, ensure the strainer baskets and October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 613
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC PIPING 23 21 13-5
screens installed in the piping systems permanent strainers are replaced with clean elements. Keep temporary strainers in service until the equipment has been tested, then replace straining element with a new strainer and clean and deliver the old straining elements to Owner. Fit the Owner's strainers with a line size blowoff valve.
4. Install bypass piping or hoses at the supply and return piping connections at heat exchangers, chillers, cooling towers, pumps, and cooling coils, etc., to prevent debris from being caught or causing damage to equipment which will be connected to the piping system.
5. Circulate a chemical cleaner in heating water piping systems to remove mill scale, grease, oil, and silt. Cleaner to be selected by chemical treatment vendor on project.
Circulate for 48 hours, flush system and replace with clean water. Dispose of chemical solution in accordance with local codes. The heating water system should then be treated with chemicals and inhibitors to be selected by chemical treatment vendor on project.
When the chemical cleaning is complete, remove, clean, and reinstall all permanent screens. Notify Owner so that the reinstallation of clean strainer screens may be witnessed.
G. Pipe Painting Requirements:
1. Paint all ferrous metal pipe including flanges. Do not paint flange bolts, washers and nuts.
At flexible coupling the only the flanges are to be painted. All rubber portions are to remain unpainted.
2. Paint exterior uninsulated steel piping with exterior latex, semi-gloss (AE), Master Painters Institute MPI 11, suitable for metallic surfaces B, Haze Gray color.
3. Use ready-mixed (including colors) paint. Prime paint with pigment and vehicle, compatible with substrate and finish coats specified. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) content of paint materials shall not exceed 50g/l for exterior latex paints and primers.
Lead-based paint is not permitted.
4. Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:
a. Less than 5 degrees F above dew point.
b. Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless specifically pre-approved by the product manufacturer.
5. Do no exterior painting when it is windy and dusty. Do not paint in direct sunlight or on surfaces that the sun will soon warm.
6. Apply only on clean, dry and frost-free surface. Remove all materials the will affect the ability of the paint to adhere to the pipe including painted pipe identification labels.
7. Remove oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, flux and other detrimental foreign. Remove loose mill scale, rust, and paint, by hand or power tool cleaning. All surfaces are to be dry at the time paint is applied.
8. Apply paint in two coats; prime, and finish. Apply each coat evenly and cover substrate completely. Allow not less than 48 hours between application of succeeding coats, except as allowed by manufacturer's printed instructions.
9. Finish surfaces to show solid even color, free from runs, lumps, brushmarks, laps, holidays, or other defects. Apply by brush, roller or spray.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 614
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 21 16-1
SECTION 23 21 16
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Instrument Probe Fittings
2. Strainers
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 01 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.
2. Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures.
4. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls. a. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this Section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 615
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 21 16-2
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Instrument Probe Fittings:
1. Pete's Plug
2. Or approved equivalent.
B. Strainers:
1. Armstrong International
2. Mueller
3. Keckley
4. Hoffman
2.2 INSTRUMENT PROBE FITTINGS
A. Brass or stainless steel body and cap, high pressure rated, valve material neoprene, Nordal or Viton to suit temperature range, 1/4-inch or 1/2-inch NPT tailpiece.
2.3 STRAINERS
A. Size 2-inches and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 PSI working pressure, Y pattern with 1/16-inch stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Basket Pattern: Flanged iron body for 175 PSI working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8-inch stainless steel perforated screen, clamped or bolted cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports. Provide vibration isolation, same as pump, to avoid short circuiting.
3.2 INSTRUMENT PROBE FITTINGS INSTALLATION
A. Test Plugs: Install where indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 616
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 21 16-3
3.3 STRAINERS INSTALLATION
A. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 617
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-1
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Ductwork, Joints, and Fittings
2. Insulated Flexible Duct
3. Ductwork Joint Sealers and Sealants
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. In addition, reference the following:
1. Section 23 05 29, Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment.
2. Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Welding Certificates.
2. Field Quality Control Reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. NFPA Compliance:
a. NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. NFPA 90B, Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
2. Comply with NFPA 96, Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations, Ch. 3, Duct System for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Provide sheet metal materials free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
4. Provide ductwork pressure testing and leakage testing per Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 618
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-2
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Duct design is generally diagrammatic and is not meant to be scaled. Major changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK, JOINTS, AND FITTINGS
A. Materials:
1. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating, minimum 26 gauge except where heavier material is specified. Ducts to have mill phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
2. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14.
Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Minimum 24 gauge except where heavier matieral is specified; alloy 6061-T651 or of equivalent strength with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts with liquid-tight joints when containing condensate vapor or liquids in suspension.
3. Stainless Steel: Fabricated in accordance with ASTM A167 and A480 with liquid-tight joints when containing condensate vapor or liquids in suspension.
B. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems not-to-exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
3. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement.
C. Formed-On Flanges: construct according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Duct Size: Maximum 30-inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.
2. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
3. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19-inches and larger and 0.0359-inch thick or less, with more than 10 SF of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.
D. Round, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of material specified in this Section according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1. Ducts up to 20-inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 619
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-3
2. Ducts 21- to 72-inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
3. Ducts Larger than 72-inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, Figure 3-2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances.
E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of dieformed, gored, and pleated elbows to be 1.5 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and flexible, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa):
a. Ducts 3- to 36-inches in Diameter: 0.034-inch.
b. Ducts 37- to 50-inches in Diameter: 0.040-inch.
c. Ducts 52- to 60-inches in Diameter: 0.052-inch.
d. Ducts 62- to 84-inches in Diameter: 0.064-inch.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3- to 26-inches in Diameter: 0.034-inch.
b. Ducts 27- to 50-inches in Diameter: 0.040-inch.
c. Ducts 52- to 60-inches in Diameter: 0.052-inch.
d. Ducts 62- to 84-inches in Diameter: 0.064-inch.
4. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for materialhandling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
5. Round Elbows:
a. 8-inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45 and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60 and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or non-standard diameter elbows with gored construction.
b. 9 through 14-inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60 and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
c. Larger than 14-inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
6. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8-inches in Diameter and Pressures 0.040-inch thick with two-piece welded construction.
7. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
8. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14-inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-inch wg (2500 Pa): 0.022-inch.
9. Not acceptable:
a. Corrugated or flexible metal duct.
b. Adjustable elbows.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 620
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-4
2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Manufacturers:
1. ATCO
2. Flexmaster
3. J.P. Lamborn Co.
4. Hart and Cooley
B. Construction: Standard factory fabricated product. Inner wall: Impervious vinyl or chlorinated polyethylene, permanently bonded to a vinyl or zinc-coated spring steel helix.
C. Insulation: Fiberglass blanket insulation covered by an outer wall of vinyl or fiberglass-reinforced metalized vapor barrier.
D. Listing: UL 181 listed Class 1 flexible air duct material. Overall thermal transmission: No more than 0.25 BTU/in or hr/sq. degrees F at 75 degrees F differential, per ASTM C335.
E. Vapor transmission value no more than 0.10 perm, per ASTM E96.
F. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive pressure and 1-inch wg negative pressure.
G. Performance Air Friction Correction Factor: 1.3 maximum at 95 percent extension. Working air velocity: Minimum 2000 FPM.
H. Flame Spread Rating: No more than 25.
I. Smoke Development Rating: No more than 50 as tested per ASTM E84.
J. Insertion Loss: Minimum attenuation of 29 DB for 10-foot straight length at 8-inch diameter at 500 Hz.
2.3 DUCTWORK JOINT SEALERS AND SEALANTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate
2. Duro Dyne
3. Hardcast
4. United McGill Corporation
5. Vulkem
6. Foster
7. Childer
8. Design Polymetrics (DP)
B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.
C. Low Emitting Materials Requirement: Adhesives, sealants and sealant primers must comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168.
D. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure and leakage class of ducts.
E. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 621
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-5
F. Water Based Sealant for Brush-On Application: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light, UL-181A, and UL-181-B listed, complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. Min. 69 percent solids, nonflammable. Hardcast Versa-Grip 181; Childers CP-146; Foster 32-19 for SMACNA 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 10-inch WG duct classes, and SMACNA Seal Class A, B, or C.
G. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
H. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
I. Polyurethane Sealant: General-purpose, exterior use, non-brittle sealant for gunned application.
Vulkem 616 or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Use the following pressure seal, and leakage class(es) in design of ductwork specified in this section unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS
(Inches of Water)
SEAL
CLASS
LEAKAGE
CLASS
ROUND
DUCTS
LEAKAGE
CLASS
RECTANGULAR
DUCTS
Medium
Pressure
Supply (fan to
terminal unit)
0.5-inch higher than air
handlers discharge
pressure (min 4-inch
pressure class).
A 2 4
Low Pressure
(downstream
of terminal
unit)
+ 1-inch A 2 4
Return and
Exhaust
0.5-inch more negative
than return/exhaust fan
pressure or -2-inch
pressure class,
whichever is more
negative.
A 2 4
B. Ductwork Installation:
1. General: Install entire duct system in accordance with drawings, Specifications, and latest issues of local Mechanical Code, NFPA 90A, and SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. At Contractor's option, rectangular ductwork may be resized to maintain an equivalent air velocity and friction rate, while maintaining a maximum aspect ratio of 3. Remove markings and tagging from ductwork exterior surface in mechanical rooms and other locations where ductwork is exposed.
2. The duct layout shown on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic in nature. Coordinate the ductwork routing and layout, and make alterations to the ductwork routing and layout to eliminate physical interferences. Where deviations in the ductwork routing as shown in the Contract Drawings are required, alterations may be made so as not to compromise the air flow, pressure drop, and sound characteristics of the duct fitting or duct run as shown on the Contract Drawings. In the event Architect determines that the installed ductwork is inconsistent with the above mentioned criteria, remove and replace at no additional cost to the Owner.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 622
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-6
3. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
4. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, shape, and for connections.
5. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12-inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
6. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
7. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
8. Install ducts with a clearance of 1-inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. Allow for easy removal of ceiling tile.
9. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.
10. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, air duct accessories, lighting layouts, and similar finish work.
11. Electrical and IT Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults, electrical equipment spaces, IDF/MPOE rooms, and enclosures.
12. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts.
Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2-inches.
13. Fire- and Smoke-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire, smoke or combination fire and smoke dampers as governed by Building Code and AHJ, including sleeves, and firestopping sealant.
14. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Reference Mason Seismic Restraint and Support Systems.
15. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed.
Follow SMACNA's Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Advanced Level.
16. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24-inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible duct material.
17. Install ductwork in the location and manner shown and detailed. Review deviations required by job conditions with Architect prior to any fabrication. Provide fittings for construction per SMACNA.
18. Install flexible ductwork to limit sag between support hangers to 1/2-inch per foot of spacing support.
C. Flanged Take-Offs:
1. Install at branch takeoffs to outlets using round or flex duct.
2. Flanged take-offs secured with minimum 8-inch screw spacing (three screws minimum).
3. Provide ductwork taps and branches off of main ducts at 45 degrees whether shown on Drawings or not (drawings are diagrammatic).
D. Cleaning:
1. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
2. Grille and Exposed Duct Cleaning:
a. After completion of ductwork installation, operate each fan system (excluding exhaust fans) for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to installation of ceiling grilles and diffusers. After grilles and diffusers are installed, clean out accumulation of particles from grilles and diffusers prior to acceptance.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 623
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-7
b. Clean exterior surface of ducts exposed to public view of chalk, pencil and pen marks, labels, sizing tags, dirt, dust, etc., so that upon completion of installation, ducts are left in clean and unblemished manufactured conditions. c. Exposed duct and grilles to remain free of dust entrained streaks due to leakage at joints and grille connections during warranty period. Clean leaks, seal and refinish to match existing if visible streaks develop.
3.2 DUCTWORK, JOINTS, AND FITTINGS INSTALLATION
A. Duct Materials - Applied Locations:
1. General: Use the following materials in design of ductwork specified in this Section unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
Location or Application Material
Supply, Return, Transfer, and Exhaust - Low
Pressure (downstream of terminal units)
Single Wall, Galvanized
Steel
Supply, Return, and Exhaust - Medium Pressure
(upstream of terminal units)
Single Wall, Galvanized
Steel
B. Ductwork Installation:
1. Fabricate radius elbows with centerline radius not less than 1-1/2 duct diameters.
2. Do not install duct size transition pitch angles which exceed 30 degrees for reductions in duct size in the direction of airflow, and 15 degrees for expansions in duct size in the direction of airflow.
3. Install fixed turning vanes in square throat rectangular elbows and in tees.
4. Fabricate duct turns with the inside (smallest) radius at least equal to the duct width (supply ducts) and 1.5 times radius (return and exhaust ducts). Where necessary, square elbows may be used, with maximum available inside radius and with fixed turning vanes.
In healthcare settings such as hospitals and medical office buildings, square elbows and turning vanes allowed on supply ductwork only.
3.3 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Provide sheet metal plenum or rigid elbow and connect to diffusers and grilles with ductwork connections. Refer to Drawings for more information. Provide straight section of flexible duct with minimum length of 2-feet and maximum length of 5-feet and connect to sheet metal plenums and rigid elbows connected to diffusers and grilles, unless noted otherwise.
1. Provide round neck grilles/diffusers or square-to-round transitions. Flexible duct connections directly to diffuser and grilles is not allowed.
2. Flexible duct allowed in concealed spaces above lay-in ceilings only.
3.4 DUCTWORK JOINT SEALERS AND SEALANTS INSTALLATION
A. Joints and Seam Joint Sealing:
1. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, for duct pressure class indicated.
2. Seal transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations including screw, fastener, pipe, rod, and wire.
3. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
4. Tape joints of PVC coated metal ductwork with PVC tape.
5. Fasteners such as sheet-metal screws, machine screws or rivets to be cadmium plated.
6. Rectangular Ductwork: Where intermediate joint reinforcement is required for duct of negative pressure class, pre-drill stiffening flange and provide fastener maximum 8-inches on center. Where retaining flanges are welded to duct wall, paint welds with zinc coating.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 624
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 31 00-8
7. Single Wall Round Ductwork: Joint to incorporate beaded slip collar with minimum #8 sheet metal screws 8-inches on center. Seal ductwork as specified in this Section.
8. Seal joints and seams. Apply sealant to make end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
9. Double Wall Round Ductwork: Joint to incorporate beaded slip collar or flanged connection, with minimum #8 sheet metal screws 8-inches on center. Seal ductwork as specified in this Section.
10. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
11. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and control devices. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
12. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities as well as Code required clearances.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 625
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-1
SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Sheet Metal Materials
2. Backdraft Dampers
3. Dampers
4. Concealed Damper Hardware
5. Access Doors
6. Duct Test Holes
7. Turning Vanes
8. Flexible Connectors
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Manufacturer's catalog data and fabrication/installation drawings for each factory fabricated duct accessory. Include leakage, pressure drop and maximum back pressure data.
2. Shop Drawings: Indicate air duct accessories.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Provide instructions for each factory fabricated duct accessory.
4. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. a. See Division 01, General Requirements, Product Requirements for additional provisions.
b. Extra Fusible Links: One of each type and size.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this Section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
3. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 626
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-2
4. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices.
5. AMCA 611, latest edition - Certified Ratings Program - Product Rating Manual for Airflow Measurement Stations.
6. AMCA 610, latest edition - Laboratory Methods of Testing Airflow Measurement Stations for Performance Rating.
7. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
8. NFPA 92A - Smoke-Control Systems.
9. NFPA 92B - Smoke Control Systems in Atria, Covered Malls and Large Areas.
10. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
11. UL 555 - Standard for Safety; Fire Dampers.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
Galvanizing: 1-1/4 ounces per square foot total both sides; ducts to have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.
D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36-inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36-inches.
2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance
2. Cesco
3. Greenheck
4. Nailor
5. Ruskin
B. Basis-of-Design: Ruskin CB D6.
C. Description: Multiple-blade gravity balanced with center pivoted blades with sealed edges, assembled in rattle free manner with 90-degree stop, adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
D. Frame: 0.125-inch thick 6063-T5 extruded aluminum channel with galvanized steel braces at mitered corners. Provide mounting flange.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 627
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-3
E. Blades: Single piece, overlap frame, parallel action, horizontal orientation, minimum 0.07-inch 6063-T5 extruded aluminum material, maximum 6-inch width.
F. Bearings: Corrosion-resistant synthetic, formed as single piece with axles.
G. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically attached to blade edge.
H. Blade Axles: Corrosion-resistant, synthetic formed as single piece with bearings, locked to blade.
I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K. Damper Capacity:
1. Closed Position: Maximum back pressure of 16-inches water gauge.
2. Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 2,500-feet per minute.
L. Counterbalances: Adjustable zinc plated steel weights mechanically attached to blade. Must be capable of operating over wide range of pressures.
M. Finish: Mill aluminum.
N. Temperature Rating: -40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
O. Operation of Blade:
1. Start to Open: 0.01-inch wg
2. Fully Open: 0.05-inch.
P. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.15-inch wg at 1,500-feet per minute through 24-inch by 24-inch damper.
Q. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gauge thickness, 12-inches in length.
R. Screen: At outdoor intake or discharge. 1/4-inch aluminum.
2.3 DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance
2. Cesco
3. Greenheck
4. Nailor
5. Ruskin
B. Basis-of-Design:
1. Rectangular ductwork for velocities and pressures up to 1,500 fpm and 2.5-inch wg, respectively: Ruskin MD-35.
2. Rectangular ductwork for velocities and pressures up to 3,000 fpm and 4-inch wg, respectively: Ruskin CD-60.
3. Round ductwork for velocities and pressures up to 3,000 fpm and 4-inch wg, respectively:
Ruskin CDSR-15.
C. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 628
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-4
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
D. Rectangular Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design with linkage concealed in frame and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum 16 gauge thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. a. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: Galvanized sheet steel, 16 gauge thick for velocities up to 1,500 fpm, and 14 gauge thick for velocities up to 3,000 fpm. b. Blade Axles: Minimum 1/2-inch diameter, plated steel, hex shaped, mechanically attached to blade.
c. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame. d. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
e. Mill galvanized.
E. Round Volume Dampers: Single-blade suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Galvanized, roll formed, minimum of 20 gauge thick with beads at each end.
2. Blades: Minimum 14 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel, round, single-piece.
3. Blade Axles: Minimum 1/2-inch square, plated steel, mechanically attached to blade.
4. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in hole in frame.
5. Finish: Mill galvanized.
6. Capacity:
a. Closed Position: Maximum pressure of 4-inches wg.
b. Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 3,000-feet per minute.
7. Leakage: Maximum 20 cfm at 4-inches wg.
8. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.02-inch wg at 1,500-feet per minute through 20-inch diameter dampers.
F. Jackshaft: 1-inch diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.
2. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include 2-inch elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.4 CONCEALED DAMPER HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Young Regulator Company
B. Concealed Damper Hardware: For dampers above non-removable ceilings (gyp, plaster, decorative, etc.) where access panels have not been shown on Architectural drawings or in locations where dampers are more than 2-feet above the ceiling, provide:
1. Concealed Damper Regulator: Young Regulator Company Model 315 or approved equivalent.
2. Cable System: Young Regulator Company or approved equivalent.
3. Controller: Young Regulator Company 270-275 or approved equivalent.
4. Control wrenches, wire stops, casing nuts, and stainless steel wire.
5. Paint cover plate to match ceiling color or as directed by Architect.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 629
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-5
2.5 ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate
2. Cesco
3. Ruskin
4. Nailor
5. Outdoor Installation: Karp MX insulated exterior access door.
B. Duct Pressure Class 2-inch WC and Greater: Sandwich-type design with threaded locking bolt assembly. Closed cell neoprene gasket permanently bonded to inside panel. Zinc-coated steel wing nuts or polypropylene molded knobs with threaded metal inserts - zinc coated bolts sealed to inner panel.
C. Duct Pressure Class 1-1/2-inch WC and Less: Galvanized steel assembly incorporating frame, door, hinges, and latch(es). Frame tabbed for attachment to duct panel. Double wall door panel with 1-inch insulation. Open cell neoprene gasket attached to frame. Cam latches for tight closure.
D. Plenum Doors: Extruded aluminum frames with extruded santoprene seals. Double-wall 20 gauge galvanized steel door panel with fiberglass insulation.
E. Size: Maximum size available to fit rectangular duct panel dimension or round duct diameter.
Plenum doors minimum 2-feet wide by 4-feet high.
F. For outdoor installation, only provide waterproof access doors installed vertically.
2.6 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ventlok
B. Temporary Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.
C. Permanent Test Holes (where shown on Drawings): Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
2.7 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Aerodyne
2. Ductmate Industries
3. Duro Dyno Corp.
4. Metalaire Inc.
B. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners to automatically align vanes.
C. Manufactured Turning Vanes: For medium pressure ductwork, ductwork upstream of terminal units, and in ductwork with equal inlet width and height dimensions and outlet width and height dimension, provide double thickness airfoil turning vanes. Low pressure ductwork and ductwork downstream of terminal units use either single thickness or double thickness turning vanes. For mitered rectangular elbows with changes in size from inlet to outlet, only use single thickness October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 630
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-6
turning vanes. Use 2-inch radius vanes spaced on centers of 1.5-inches for single thickness.
Use 2-inch radius vanes spaced on centers of 2.125-inches for double thickness.
D. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Duro Dyne Corp.
2. Ventfabrics Inc.
3. Ductmate Industries
4. Hardcast
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 4-inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.
D. Provide a spring and bracket assembly to reinforce the fabric with sufficient tension to prevent connector collapse under negative or positive pressure. Number and positioning of spring-link fixture to be determined by the manufacturer to maintain straight axis and without kinks between two sections of duct, or between duct and the moving element. Hardcast Spring-Link SL-200, or equal.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric (FC-I): Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 30 ounces per square yard.
2. Tensile Strength: 395 pounds of force per inch in the warp and 255 pounds of force per inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: -40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric (FC-O): Glass fabric double coated with Hypalon, resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 ounces per square yard.
2. Tensile Strength: 225 pounds of force per inch in the warp and 300 pounds of force per inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: -40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors (FC-HT): Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.
1. Minimum Weight: 30 ounces per square yard.
2. Tensile Strength: 372 pounds of force per inch in the warp and 372pounds of force per inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: -70 degrees F to 500 degrees F.
H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors (FC-HC): Glass fabric with chemicalresistant coating.
1. Minimum Weight: 14 ounces per square yard.
2. Tensile Strength: 450 pounds of force per inch in the warp and 340 pounds of force per inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: -67 degrees F to 500 degrees F.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 631
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT ACCESSORIES GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Inspect areas to receive air duct accessories. Notify Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect the installation of the dampers. Do not proceed until conditions are corrected.
B. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.
C. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
D. Do not compress or stretch damper frames into duct or opening.
E. Handle dampers using sleeve or frame. Do not lift dampers using blades, actuators, or jack shafts.
F. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
3.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS INSTALLATION
A. Install bracing for multiple sections to support assembly weights and hold against system pressure. Install bracing as needed.
3.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS INSTALLATION
A. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. Provide at outside air intakes where motorized dampers are not shown on drawings.
3.4 DAMPERS INSTALLATION
A. Where installing volume dampers in ducts with liner, avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
B. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from each branch takeoff. Provide balancing dampers for all air inlets and outlets.
C. Install dampers square and free from racking with blade running horizontally.
3.5 CONCEALED DAMPER HARDWARE INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate location in Reflected Ceiling Plan and color of concealed damper hardware with Architect prior to installation.
3.6 ACCESS DOORS INSTALLATION
A. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes and equipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.
4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 632
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-8
5. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
a. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8-inches by 5-inches. b. Two-Hand Access: 12-inches by 6-inches.
c. Head and Hand Access: 18-inches by 10-inches.
d. Head and Shoulders Access: 21-inches by 14-inches.
e. Body Access: 25-inches by 14-inches.
f. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25-inches by 17-inches.
6. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:
a. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8-inches in diameter. b. Two-Hand Access: 10-inches in diameter.
c. Head and Hand Access: 12-inches in diameter.
d. Head and Shoulders Access: 18-inches in diameter.
e. Body Access: 24-inches in diameter.
7. Label access doors.
3.7 DUCT TEST HOLES INSTALLATION
A. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets where indicated and where required for air testing and balancing.
3.8 TURNING VANES INSTALLATION
A. Vanes must be installed, eliminating every other vane is not allowed.
B. Single thickness vanes cannot be over 36-inches long without intermediate vane runner.
C. Install per SMACNA and fasten/support to prevent vibration, noise, and to maintain proper alignment at design velocity.
3.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. Provide sheet metal weather cover over flexible connections located outdoors. Attach sheet metal to either equipment side or ductwork side, but not both.
B. Per NFPA, do not use flexible connectors on grease exhaust fans.
C. Securely attach spring-lock brackets to the metal strips of the connector collar using No. 8 sheet metal screws.
D. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
E. Adjust the following types in the following locations:
1. FC-I: Indoors.
2. FC-O: Outdoors.
3. FC-HT: High temperature exhaust systems and smoke removal systems.
4. FC-HC: High corrosive systems inclusive of all laboratory exhaust systems.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 633
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC FANS 23 34 00-1
SECTION 23 34 00
HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Centrifugal Fans
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gauges and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. For belt-driven fans, indicate the number of belts provided for design duty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Motors: Premium efficiency. Electrically Commutated Motors (ECM) where scheduled on Drawings.
2. Sound power levels as scheduled on Drawings. If not scheduled, within 5 percent of Basis of Design at design flow.
3. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions for project sites below 2,000 feet in elevation. Base air ratings on actual site elevations for project sites above 2,000 feet in elevation.
4. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
5. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
6. AMCA Compliance: Products are to comply with performance requirements and are to be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
7. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories are to comply with NEMA standards.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 634
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC FANS 23 34 00-2
8. UL Standard: HVAC Fans are to comply with UL 705. Fans used in grease exhaust applications are to be UL 705 - Supplement SC listed for grease exhaust. Fans used for smoke control applications are to be UL 705 - Supplement SD listed for Power Ventilators for Smoke Control.
9. Belt-driven fans used for smoke control applications are to have 1.5 times the number of belts required for the design duty, with the minimum number of belts being two.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Greenheck
2. Cook
3. Twin City
B. Description: Centrifugal or utility type centrifugal fans, as indicated, standard factory finish, AMCA rated, single width, single inlet, double width, double inlet, forward curved, backward inclined, or airfoil blades as scheduled.
C. Wheel and Inlet:
1. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate, backwardly curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast iron or cast steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 635
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC FANS 23 34 00-3
2. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate die formed hollow airfoil shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange, and back plate; cast iron or cast steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.
3. Statically and dynamically balance wheel within its own bearings with maximum balance quality grade at bearings of G16 (0.20 in/sec peak velocity, filter-in as measured at fan RPM) for 5 hp and below and G6.3 (0.15 in/sec peak velocity, filter-in as measured at fan RPM) for 7.5 hp and above per ANSI S2.19. AMCA 210 rated.
D. Housing:
1. Heavy gauge steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously welded for Class III, adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut.
2. Finish: Factory finish to manufacturer's standard (Permatector). Prime coating of aluminum parts is not allowed.
3. Removable angles and bolts for attaching flexible connections and discharge dampers on fan outlet.
4. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions.
E. Bearings and Drives:
1. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self-greasing ball bearings, with ABMA 9 L-10 life at 100,000 hours.
2. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and shaft guard. Provide anti-corrosive coating.
3. Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 5 hp and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position fixed sheave for 7.5 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
5. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible;
0.106-inch thick, 3/4-inch diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
F. Motor: Integrally mounted, 1800 RPM maximum, with pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings. ODP for motors located indoors and TEFC for motors exposed to moisture.
G. Accessories:
1. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid, removable, at unit outlet for outdoor installation, and unit inlet for unducted conditions.
2. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick opening latch type handles and gaskets.
3. Scroll Drain: 1/2-inch steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll for outdoor installation.
4. AMCA 99 Type B spark proof construction where scheduled.
5. Protective coating on fan wheel and interior of fan housing where scheduled. Apply coating before balancing fans and repair any breaks in coating which occur during balancing. One 6-mil coat of white plastic #7122 and one 6-mil coat of black plastic #7122.
6. Vibration isolation as scheduled and specified. Reference Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 636
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC FANS 23 34 00-4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
C. Fans used for exhaust of kitchen grease hoods are to be UL 705 - Supplement SC listed for grease exhaust. Provide fans with grease terminator. Pipe from grease terminator to Code approved location.
D. Fans used for exhaust of moist air are to be constructed of aluminum construction and be warranted for their application in moist conditions.
E. Fans used in welding, chemical, and/or fume exhaust applications are to be of spark-proof construction and are to be protected with coatings as required to protect parts in the air stream from the chemicals and materials the fan will be exposed to.
F. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases.
G. Units using vibration isolation devices are scheduled on Drawings.
H. Support suspended units from structure threaded steel rods and vibration isolation device scheduled on Drawings.
I. In seismic zones, restrain support units.
J. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
K. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
L. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
M. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain.
N. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated on Drawings.
O. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23, HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors per Section 23 33 00, Air Duct Accessories.
P. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
Q. Ground equipment.
R. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
S. Equipment Startup Checks:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 637
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HVAC FANS 23 34 00-5
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication from bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
T. Starting Procedures:
1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record voltage and amperage.
U. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
V. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
W. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
X. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
Y. Provide totally enclosed fan cooled motors when motor is located outdoors, whether under a cover or not, or exposed to moisture. Provide protective covering for electronically commutated motors located in outdoor or wet/wash-down locations.
Z. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.
AA. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
BB. Adjust belt tension.
CC. Lubricate bearings.
DD. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.
EE. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
FF. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC fans. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 638
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00-1
SECTION 23 36 00
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Single Duct Variable Volume and Constant Volume Units
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Air Terminal Units:
1. Titus
2. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME AND CONSTANT VOLUME UNITS A. Casings: Minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel.
B. 1/2-inch dual density insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Exposed insulation edges to be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent entrainment of fibers in the airstream.
C. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S slip drive connections for duct attachment.
D. Plenum Air Outlets: S slip and drive connections.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 639
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00-2
E. Casing Leakage: Maximum casing leakage not to exceed 10 cfm at 1-inch static pressure for inlet size larger than 12-inches and not to exceed 7 cfm at 1-inch static pressure for inlet size 12-inches and smaller.
1. Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate control components inside protective metal shroud.
2. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self lubricating bearings; maximum damper leakage: 7 cfm maximum at inlet static pressure. Shaft to be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. Damper to incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking and a synthetic seal to limit close off leakage to the maximum values shown in the damper leakage table.
3. Flow Sensor: Integral averaging type flow sensor utilizing multiple sensing points with unit mounted calibration chart.
F. Attenuator Section: Line attenuator sections with 2-inch thick insulation.
G. Hot Water Heating Coil:
1. Construction: 1/2-inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, leak tested under water to 200 PSIG pressure, factory installed.
H. Acoustics: Sound ratings tested as power level 10-12 watts in accordance with AHRI 880 I-P at
1.5-inches wg inlet static pressure. NC ratings calculated per AHRI 885 with room attenuations as listed in Appendix E, and not to exceed values scheduled on Drawings.
1. MAXIMUM AIRBORNE SOUND POWER (db)
a. OCTAVE BAND AND CENTER FREQUENCY (HZ)
b. Units must have 5-feet of 2-inch thick lined duct downstream of terminal unit.
CFM 2 3 4 5 6 7
125 250 500 1K 2K 4K
0-300 69 65 63 60 60 55
301-400 70 69 64 60 60 55
401-800 72 70 67 64 60 55
801-1100 74 71 68 67 60 60
1101-1700 75 73 70 67 60 60
1701 and
above
80 78 76 67 63 62
2. MAXIMUM RADIATED SOUND POWER (db)
a. OCTAVE BAND AND CENTER FREQUENCY (HZ)
CFM 2 3 4 5 6 7
125 250 500 1K 2K 4K
All 71 65 61 55 55 50
I. DDC Controls: Damper operator, sensor, and other devices compatible with temperature controls specified in Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Control Performance Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install level and plumb.
B. Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract Documents.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 640
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00-3
C. Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal manufacturer to achieve proper performance.
D. Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
E. Verify that control connections are complete.
F. Check that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
G. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
H. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.
I. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
J. Provide 9-inch by 9-inch access door with quarter turn latches upstream and downstream of each heating coil.
K. Provide minimum five duct diameters minimum straight duct run upstream of terminal unit.
L. Minimum of 3-feet straight duct downstream of terminal unit prior to first outlet or first branch duct.
M. Branch inlet duct size to match unit inlet connection. For branch inlet ducts over 15-feet long, increase branch duct size one size and provide transition immediately upstream of minimum straight duct run.
N. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 31 00, HVAC Ducts and Casings.
O. Provide minimum of five feet of 1-inch thick lined ductwork downstream of units. Lining to match terminal unit lining type.
1. Do not provide lined ductwork in group "H" occupancies.
P. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
Q. Balance unit to air flows scheduled.
R. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air terminals and duct connection to air terminals are leak tight. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks and retest to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 641
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00-1
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 23, HVAC and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size and accessories furnished.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Air Distribution Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule lists Basis of Design, with any specialty accessories, construction, finish or other criteria noted on schedule. Submitted air distribution must match criteria of Basis of Design:
a. Construction materials and appearance.
b. Frame/installation method.
c. Isothermal throw plus or minus 5 percent at design flows shown on drawings. d. Noise Criteria: NC value plus or minus 1 at design flows shown on drawings. e. Accessories: Equal to Basis of Design.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 23 00 00, HVAC Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 642
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 23, HVAC sections, where more than a single type is specified for the application, provide single selection for each product category.
B. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers:
1. Anemostat
2. Carnes
3. Environmental Air Products
4. Krueger
5. Metalaire
6. Nailor
7. Price Co.
8. Shoemaker
9. Titus
10. Tuttle & Bailey
11. Seiho
12. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS
A. Diffuser, Register and Grille Schedule lists Basis of Design, with specialty accessories, construction, finish or other criteria noted on schedule. Submitted air distribution must match criteria of Basis of Design, including accessories and finish:
1. Matching construction materials and appearance. Equal installation method/frame.
2. Pressure drop equal to or less than Basis of Design at CFM on Drawings.
3. Throw: Isothermal jet throw plus or minus 5 percent of Basis of Design at CFM listed on Drawings.
4. Noise Criteria: Plus or minus 1 NC of Basis of Design at CFM listed on Drawings. If Basis of Design NC is below registered level, submitted must match. NC rating with 10 dB room factor or less.
B. Provide 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-way deflection as indicated on Drawings.
C. Provide pattern controllers for linear supply air diffusers.
D. Register Dampers: Dampers utilized with grilles. Opposed blade dampers utilizing a side operated worm drive which provides external duct operation. Slot the end of the shaft to receive a screwdriver. Factory assembled side operator. Construct of the same material as the grille.
Manufacturer same as grilles/diffuser.
E. Coordinate mounting frames with ceiling construction type. Verify per reflected ceiling plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide seismic supports, clips, and bracing per local code. Coordinate installation of framing. Provide complete coverage of rough openings by integral device flanges or auxiliary frames. Where above ceiling location is unconditioned space, caulk rough openings; repair and re-paint locations where dust entrainment streaks develop due to unsealed openings.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 643
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 37 00-3
B. Damp locations, such as lockers, restrooms, showers, natatoriums, whirlpool/spas, to have aluminum construction even if scheduled otherwise; mounting hardware to be stainless steel.
C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
D. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, for ceiling mounted air outlets with adjustable airflow pattern controllers mounted at a height of 12 feet or less, adjust the air outlets for horizontal air distribution, and adjust to vertical air distribution for ceiling height above 12 feet.
E. Exterior color of grilles per Architect. White finish if not otherwise scheduled or noted by Architect. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
F. Ceiling Membrane: Protect ceiling membrane per code. Fire caulk around openings. Provide listed radiation damper in rated roof/ceiling or floor/ceiling assemblies as required per code.
G. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.
3.2 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan(s). Reflected ceiling plans determine final locations.
B. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. 18-inch straight duct section or acoustic plenum at connection. Provide square to round adapters where required for connection to round ducts.
C. Provide integral balancing dampers for diffusers, and grilles and registers where duct manual balancing dampers are not shown or specified.
D. Linear Slot Diffusers:
1. Coordinate connection plenum dimensions with linear slot final dimensions to conform with manufacturer's recommendations, or as indicated. Total and active lengths as noted on drawings. Blank off unused sections. Coordinate frame type with Architect.
2. Paint surfaces visible behind air outlets and inlets, including blank-off sections, matte black unless otherwise called for on drawings.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 644
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-1
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements applies to Division 26, Electrical work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of electrical systems for proposed project.
B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.
C. Definitions:
1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.
3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished.
4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.
5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section applies to Division 26, Electrical Contract Documents.
B. Related Work:
1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. Drawings
c. Addenda
d. Owner/Architect Agreement
e. Owner/Contractor Agreement
f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 26, Electrical Sections and those listed in this Section.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 645
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-2
B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:
1. State of California:
a. CALGreen - California Green Building Standards Code (CCR, Title 24, Part 11) b. CBC - California Building Code
c. CEC - California Electrical Code
d. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
e. CFC - California Fire Code
f. CMC - California Mechanical Code
g. CPC - California Plumbing Code
h. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:
1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act
2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act
3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
4. APWA - American Public Works Association
5. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers
6. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process
7. ASTM - ASTM International
8. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations
9. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency
10. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
11. FCC - Federal Communications Commission
12. FM - FM Global
13. IBC - International Building Code
14. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
15. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
16. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society
17. ISO - International Organization for Standardization
18. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society
19. NEC - National Electric Code
20. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association
21. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
22. NETA - National Electrical Testing Association
23. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
24. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
25. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
D. See Division 26, Electrical individual Sections for additional references.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.
C. In addition:
1. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 646
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-3
confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.
2. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section. Provide a table of contents identifying the products being submitted for each specification section. Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. All transmissions/submissions to be submitted to Architect. Deviations will be returned without review. a. Provide separate submittals for lighting control cutsheets, and for lighting control shop drawings.
3. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 26, Electrical Sections.
4. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the Specifications and Drawings. a. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.
Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.
b. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided.
Reference individual Division 26, Electrical specification Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements. c. See Division 26, Electrical individual Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.
5. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of these additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review.
6. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 26, Electrical Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical submittals. Electric motors are supplied and installed by Division 23 unless otherwise specified. During shop drawing stage of the project, verify correct disconnect sizes, conductor sizes, etc., and bring any discrepancies to the attention of the Mechanical trade. Be responsible for any modifications to electrical equipment or installations as a result of equipment incompatibility discovered after shop drawing review.
7. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.
8. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:
a. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional. b. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 647
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-4
than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.
9. Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams.
Reference individual Division 26, Electrical specification Sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements. a. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.
10. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.
11. Resubmission Requirements:
a. Make corrections or changes in submittals as required in response to Engineer’s comments. Provide a cover letter with resubmittal that includes responses to each of the Engineer’s submittal review comments and identifies changes in the resubmittal. Cloud changes in the submittals.
1) Resubmit for review until review indicates “no exception taken” or “make corrections noted.”
2) When submitting drawings for Engineer's re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and cloud any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.
12. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:
a. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
1) Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
2) Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities, relevant to each piece of equipment. 3) Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
4) Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. 5) Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub assemblies.
6) Include commissioning reports.
7) Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. 8) Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
b. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements, Demonstration.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 648
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-5
c. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.
13. Record Drawings:
a. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “As-constructed” conditions. Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of conduit, and location of concealed electrical items. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.
b. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project. c. At completion of project, input changes to original project on Revit Model and make one set of black-line drawings created from Revit Model in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit Revit Model and drawings upon substantial completion.
d. Record drawings solely referencing field orders, supplemental instructions, etc. without any revision markups based on the change responses are not acceptable. e. See Division 26, Electrical individual Sections for additional items to include in record drawings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.
B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.
C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e. distribution equipment, duct banks, light fixtures, etc.) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.
E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.
F. Making, supervising, or directing the making of an electrical installation which does not meet minimum safety standards is not allowed.
G. Except as authorized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, do not remove, transfer, alter or otherwise tamper with an inspection permit, label, tag or other indicia of inspection placed on or at an electrical job site, electrical installation or electrical product.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 649
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-6
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.
Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.
1.7 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of HVAC equipment, ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, plumbing equipment/fixtures, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, cable tray and electrical services with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, fire protection, electrical, ceiling suspension, and tile systems), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.
B. Coordination drawings to be provided for the following systems, at a minimum, for review and approval:
1. Routing of Raceways and Boxes
2. Lighting
C. Prepare Drawings as follows:
1. Drawings in Revit Model. Revit Model release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.
2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.
3. Incorporate Addenda items and change orders.
4. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.
D. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.
E. Verify in field exact size, location, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto.
F. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer.
2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 650
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-7
and are to be UL or ETL listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.
B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.
C. Hazardous Materials:
1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.
2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.
3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
B. Install equipment requiring access (i.e., junction boxes, light fixtures, power supplies, motors, etc.) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block the intended usage.
C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.
Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing, and coordination with other trades and disciplines.
D. Firestopping:
1. Confirm requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26, Electrical Sections and the following:
a. Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
E. Plenums:
1. In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy.
F. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment and conduit.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 651
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-8
3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, and individual Division 26 Electrical Sections.
B. General:
1. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.
2. Provide stamped shop drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for conduit and equipment. Submit shop drawings along with equipment submittals.
3. Provide stamped shop drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic flexible joints for conduit crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit shop drawings along with seismic bracing details.
4. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of electrical equipment during earthquake.
3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:
1. Underground conduit installation prior to backfilling.
2. Prior to covering walls.
3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.
4. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.
C. Final Punch:
1. Prior to requesting a final punch visit from the Engineer, request from Engineer the Electrical Precloseout Checklist, complete the checklist confirming completion of systems’ installation, and return to Engineer. Request a final punch visit from the Engineer, upon Engineer's acceptance that the electrical systems are ready for final punch.
2. Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, and Division 01, General Requirements. In the absence of specific requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, comply with individual Division 26, Electrical Sections and the following:
1. During remodeling or addition to existing structure, while existing structure is occupied, present services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed.
2. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every item is thoroughly prepared.
Install new wiring, and wiring to point of connection.
3. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off-peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference to a minimum.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 652
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-9
a. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work.
4. No interruption of services to any part of existing facilities will be permitted without express permission in each instance from Owner. Requests for outages must state specific dates, hours and maximum durations, with outages kept to these specific dates, hours and maximum durations. Obtain written permission from Owner for any interruption of power, lighting or signal circuits and systems.
a. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption. b. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In the absence of specific requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, comply with individual Division 26, Electrical Sections and the following:
1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).
2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftspeople of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.
3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.
Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.
4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and/or walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.
5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.6 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.
3.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26, Electrical Sections and the following:
1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt, and/or dust as a result of improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation.
2. Protect equipment to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.
3. Protect bus duct and similar items until in service.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 653
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-10
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems and demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect, and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required.
Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean electrical equipment, removing dirt, debris, dust, temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.
3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
B. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturers' installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment.
3.11 PAINTING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26, Electrical Sections and the following:
1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces (i.e., hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, etc.) with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 654
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-11
2. In Electrical Room, on roof or other exposed areas, equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.
3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.
4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.
5. Conduit: Clean, primer coat and paint interior/exterior conduit exposed in public areas with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces. Color selected by Architect.
6. Covers: Covers such as manholes, vaults and the like will be furnished with finishes which resist corrosion and rust.
3.12 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26, Electrical Sections and the following:
1. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to electrical system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work.
2. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas. Owner will cooperate to best of their ability to assist in coordinated schedule, but will remain final authority as to time of work permitted.
3. Examination:
a. Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. b. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. c. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
1) Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish work.
2) Verify location and number of electrical outlets, luminaires, panels, etc. in field.
d. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 1) Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.
4. Execution:
a. Remove existing luminaires, switches, receptacles, and other electrical equipment and devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless shown as retained or relocated on Drawings.
b. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain electrical continuity of existing systems during construction. Remove or relocate electrical boxes, conduit, wiring, equipment, and luminaires, as encountered in removed or remodeled areas in existing construction affected by this work.
c. Remove and restore wiring which serves usable existing outlets clear of construction or demolition.
d. If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, provide new conduit and wire to bypass inaccessible junction boxes and abandoned outlets.
e. If existing conduits pass through partitions or ceiling which are being removed or remodeled, provide new conduit and wire to reroute clear of construction or demolition and maintain service to existing load.
f. Extend circuiting and devices in existing walls to be furred out. g. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 655
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-12
h. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
i. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.
j. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.
k. Existing lighting which is to remain, leave luminaires in proper working order. l. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work. m. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
3.13 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 26, Electrical Sections and the following:
1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:
a. Cleaning
b. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
c. Training of Operating Personnel
d. Record Drawings
e. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates
f. Start-up/Test Document and Commissioning Reports
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and individual Division 26, Electrical Sections.
B. Tests:
1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in operation and maintenance manuals.
2. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide appropriate personnel with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.
3.15 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement that Electrical items were installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
3.16 SALVAGED EQUIPMENT AND RECYCLED MATERIAL
A. Salvage the following equipment not being reused and return to Owner:
1. Luminaires
2. Receptacles
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 656
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-13
B. Electrical equipment that cannot be salvaged for reuse, sell/give to recycling company. Recycle following excess, removed, or demolished electrical material:
1. Copper or aluminum conductors, buses.
2. Steel and aluminum from raceways, boxes, enclosures, and housings.
3. Acrylic and glass from luminaire lenses/refractors.
C. Provide separate on-site storage space for recycled and salvaged material. Clearly label space.
D. Confirm additional salvaged equipment and recycled materials in the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 657
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-1
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Lugs and Pads
2. Wires and Cables
3. Splices
4. Connectors
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Cable insulation test reports in project closeout documentation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lugs and Pads:
1. Anderson
2. Ilsco
3. Panduit
4. Thomas & Betts
5. 3M
6. Or approved equivalent.
B. Wires and Cables:
1. General:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 658
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-2
a. General Cable
b. Okonite
c. Southwire
d. Encore Wire
e. Or approved equivalent.
C. Splices:
1. Branch Circuit Splices:
a. Ideal
b. 3M Scotchlok
c. Uraseal, Inc.
d. Or approved equivalent.
D. Connectors:
1. Anderson Power Products
2. Burndy
3. Ilsco
4. 3M
5. Thomas & Betts
6. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 LUGS AND PADS
A. Ampacity: Cross-sectional area of pad for multiple conductor terminations to match ampere rating of panelboard bus or equipment line terminals.
B. Copper Pads: Drilled and tapped for multiple conductor terminals.
C. Lugs: Compression type for use with stranded branch circuit or control conductors; mechanical type for use with solid branch and feeder circuit conductors.
2.3 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Building Wires:
1. Copper: Soft-drawn with conductivity of not less than 98 percent IACS at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F). 600 volt rated throughout. Conductors 12 AWG and 10 AWG, solid or stranded. Conductors 8 AWG and larger, stranded. 12 AWG minimum conductor size.
Minimum insulation rating of 90 degrees C. Insulation Type: THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2 on roofs.
B. Phase color to be consistent at feeder terminations; A-B-C, top to bottom, left to right, front to back.
C. Color Code Conductors as Follows:
PHASE 208 VOLT WYE 480 VOLT
A Black Brown
B Red Orange
C Blue Yellow
Neutral White Gray or White w/colored strip
Ground Green Green
Isolated Ground Green w/yellow trace N/A
D. MC Cable: Not allowed.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 659
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-3
E. AC Cable (Armored Cable): Not allowed.
F. NMB Cable: Not allowed.
2.4 SPLICES
A. Branch Circuits: Twist on, high temperature, grounding type wing nuts.
1. Ideal Industries Wing-Nut Twist-On Connectors.
2. 3M Scotchlok Twist-On Wire Connectors.
2.5 CONNECTORS
A. Split bolt connectors not allowed.
B. Conductor Branch Circuits: Wire nuts with integral spring connectors for conductors 12 AWG through 8 AWG. Push-in type connectors where conductors are not required to be twisted together are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install per manufacturer instructions and CEC.
B. Field Quality Control:
1. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA Standard ATS, except Section 4.
2. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA Standard ATS, Section 7.3.2.
3.2 LUGS AND PADS
A. Thoroughly clean surfaces to remove all dirt, oil, grease, or paint.
B. Use torque wrench to tighten per manufacturer's directions.
3.3 WIRES AND CABLES
A. General:
1. Do not install or handle thermoplastic insulated wire and cable in temperatures below -10 degrees C (14 degrees F). Do not handle thermoset insulated wire and cable in temperatures below -40 degrees C (-40 degrees F). All wire and cable must be acclimated to temperatures above freezing for no less than 24 hours prior to installation.
2. Install conductors in raceways having adequate, code size cross-sectional area for wires indicated.
3. Install conductors with care to avoid damage to insulation.
4. Do not apply greater tension on conductors than recommended by manufacturer during installation.
5. Use of pulling compounds is permitted. Clean residue from exposed conductors and raceway entrances after conductor installation. Do not use pulling compounds for installation of conductors connected to GFCI circuit breakers or GFCI receptacles.
6. Conductor Size and Quantity:
a. Install no conductors smaller than 12 AWG unless otherwise shown. b. Provide required conductors for a fully operable system. c. Power Circuits: No. 12 AWG minimum, except as follows:
1) No. 10 AWG for 20A, 120V circuits longer than 60-feet but not exceeding 89-feet.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 660
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-4
2) No. 8 AWG for 20A, 120V circuits longer than 90-feet but not exceeding 139-feet.
d. When exact run lengths are determined for all branch circuits, and prior to installation of the conductors, ensure that the maximum voltage drop, based on 80 percent of the circuit protective device, does not exceed 3 percent. Increase wire size from No. 12 AWG, if necessary, to ensure that the 3 percent voltage drop is not exceeded.
7. Provide dedicated neutrals (one neutral conductor for each phase conductor) in all 120V circuits and all 277V circuits.
B. Conductors in Cabinets:
1. Conductors and cables within panels and cabinets are to be made up in a clean and workmanlike manner.
2. Cable and tree wires in panels and cabinets for power and control. Use plastic ties in panels and cabinets.
3. Tie and bundle feeder conductors in wireways of panelboards.
4. Hold conductors away from sharp metal edges.
C. Homeruns:
1. Do not change intent of branch circuit homeruns without approval. Homeruns for 20A branch circuits may be combined to a maximum of six current carrying conductors including neutral conductors in homeruns. Apply derating factors as required per NEC.
Increase conductor size as needed.
2. MC cable homeruns are not allowed.
D. Identify wire and cable under the provisions of Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. Identify each conductor with its panel and circuit number as indicated.
E. Exposed cable is not allowed.
F. All cable must be run parallel or perpendicular to building lines and hidden from view when possible. Where installed in tray each power cable is to be identified with Lamacoid nametag engraved with identification of equipment being fed. Tag to be fastened to cable using tie-wraps.
Provide nametag at each floor level.
G. Do not install PVC jacketed cables in return air plenums, unless they are specially rated plenum cables.
3.4 SPLICES
A. Make splices complete and promptly after wire installation. Provide single wire pigtails for luminaire and device connections. Wire nuts may be used for luminaire wire connections to single wire circuit conductor pigtails.
B. Make splices for No. 8 and larger wires with mechanically applied pressure type connectors.
Make all taped joints with Scotch 33+ or equal, applied in half-lap layers without stretching to deform. Uraseal splice kits are also acceptable through 250 KCMIL.
C. Remove insulation using industry approved means and methods to ensure all conductors are free of damage upon completion.
3.5 CONNECTORS
A. Install to assure a solid and safe connection.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 661
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-5
B. Select hand twist connectors for wire size and install tightly on conductors.
C. Install compression connectors using methods and tools recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Do not install stranded conductors under screw terminals unless compression lugs are installed.
E. Do not connect wiring without UL listed connectors that are listed for the purposes.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 662
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 26-1
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Connectors and Accessories
2. Grounding Conductor
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Test reports of ground resistance for service and separately derived system grounds.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Comply with the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Connectors and Accessories:
1. Burndy Hyground Compression System
2. Erico/Cadweld
3. Amp Ampact Grounding System
4. Pipe Grounding Clamp:
a. Burndy GAR Series
b. O Z Gedney
c. Thomas & Betts
d. Or approved equivalent.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 663
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 26-2
B. Grounding Conductor
1. General Cable
2. Okonite
3. Southwire
4. Or approved equivalent
2.2 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Grounding Connectors: Hydraulic compression tool applied connectors or exothermic welding process connectors or powder actuated compression tool applied connectors.
B. Pipe Grounding Clamp: Mechanical ground connector with cable parallel or perpendicular to pipe.
2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Soft-draw bare stranded copper for wire sizes larger than #10 AWG Bare. Solid copper for wire sizes #10 AWG and smaller.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated, insulation type to match that of associated feeder or branch circuit wiring, size as indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Verify site conditions prior to beginning work.
B. Corrosion inhibitors: Apply a corrosion inhibitor to contact surfaces when making grounding and bonding connections. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between metals used.
C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA Standard ATS, except Section 4.
D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA Standard AB, Section 7.13.
3.2 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
A. Raceways:
1. Ground metallic raceway systems. Bond to ground terminal with code size jumper except where code size or larger equipment grounding conductor is included with circuit, use grounding bushing with lay-in lug.
2. Connect metal raceways, which terminate within an enclosure but without mechanical connection to enclosure, by grounding bushings and ground conductor to grounding bus.
3. Install equipment grounding conductor, code size minimum unless noted on drawings, in metallic and nonmetallic raceway systems.
B. Branch Circuits:
1. Provide continuous green insulated copper equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 664
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 26-3
2. Where installed in a continuous solid metallic raceway system and larger sizes are not detailed, provide insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits sized in accordance with the latest adopted edition of NEC Article 250, Table 250- 122.
C. Motors: Install code size equipment grounding conductor to (motor) equipment frame or manufacturer's designated ground terminal.
D. Receptacles: Connect ground terminal of receptacle and associated outlet box to equipment grounding conductor. Self grounding nature of receptacle devices does not eliminate equipment grounding conductor bolted to outlet box.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 665
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-1
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Anchors, Threaded Rod, and Fasteners
2. Support Channel, Hangers, and Supports
3. Rooftop Conduit Supports
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals not required for this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of bolted metal framing support systems, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for code required pipe support, trapeze, equipment hangers/supports, and seismic restraint by a qualified Structural Professional Engineer. a. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide conduit and equipment hangers and supports in accordance with the following:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 666
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-2
1. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment and supports, anchorages and seismic restraints for conduit, cable tray and equipment are not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor is responsible for their design.
2. Connections to structural framing shall not introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required.
B. Engineered Support Systems: The following support systems to be designed, detailed, and bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State of California.
1. Support frames such as conduit racks or stanchions for conduit and equipment which provide support from below.
2. Equipment and piping support frame anchorage to supporting slab or structure.
C. Provide channel support systems, for conduits to support multiple conduits capable of supporting combined weight of support systems and system contents.
D. Provide heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple conduit capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and system contents.
E. Provide seismic restraint hangers and supports for conduit and equipment.
F. Obtain approval from AHJ for seismic restraint hanger and support system to be installed for piping and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Anchors, Threaded Rod, and Fasteners:
1. Anchor It
2. Epcon System
3. Hilti-Hit System
4. Power Fast System
5. Or approved equivalent.
B. Support Channel, Hangers, and Supports:
1. B-Line
2. Kindorf
3. Superstrut
4. Unistrut
5. Or approved equivalent.
C. Rooftop Conduit Supports:
1. Cooper B-Line Dura-Block Rooftop Support Base
2. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 ANCHORS, THREADED ROD, AND FASTENERS
A. Anchors, Threaded Rod and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
B. Concrete Inserts: Cast in concrete for support fasteners for loads up to 800-pounds.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 667
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-3
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of types as required for assembly and installation of fabricated items; surface-applied fasteners are specified elsewhere.
E. Bolts: Low carbon steel externally and internally threaded fasteners conforming with requirements of ASTM A307; include necessary nuts and plain hardened washers. For structural steel elements supporting mechanical material or equipment from building structural members or connection thereto, use fasteners conforming to ASTM A325.
F. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide incidental accessory materials, tools, methods, and equipment required for fabrication.
2.3 SUPPORT CHANNEL, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and Supports - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
1. Channel Material: Carbon steel.
2. Coating: Hot dip galvanized.
B. Pipe Straps: Two-hole galvanized or malleable iron.
C. Luminaire Chain: Carbon steel with zinc plated finish. Rated to minimum 90-pound safe working load.
D. Miscellaneous Metal: Provide miscellaneous metal items specified hereunder, including materials, fabrication, fastenings and accessories required for finished installation, where indicated on Drawings or otherwise not shown on drawings that are necessary for completion of the project. The Contractor is responsible for their design.
1. Fabricate miscellaneous units to size shapes and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.
E. Structural Shapes: Where miscellaneous metal items are needed to be fabricated from structural steel shapes and plates, provide members constructed of steel conforming with requirements of ASTM A36 or approved equivalent.
F. Steel Pipe: Provide seamless steel pipe conforming to requirements of ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, or Grade B. Weight and size required as specified.
G. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide incidental accessory materials, tools, methods, and equipment required for fabrication.
2.4 ROOFTOP CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Curb base made of 100 percent recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with a uniform load
B. Capacity of 500 pounds per linear foot of support.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 668
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-4
C. UV resistant.
D. Steel Frame: Steel, 14 gauge strut galvanized per ASTM A653 or 12 gauge strut galvanized per ASTM A653 for bridge series.
E. Continuous block channel supports with 1-inch gaps to allow water flow, bridge channel supports, extendable height channel supports and elevated single conduit supports.
F. Attaching Hardware: Zinc-plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM B633 fastened directly into rubber material with weather resistant Type 12 lag screws.
G. Provide load distribution plates when required for heavy loads.
H. Finish: Black with safety yellow striping.
I. Provide hot dipped galvanized components for items exposed to weather.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabrication - Miscellaneous Metals
1. General: Verify dimensions prior to fabrication. Form metal items to accurate sizes and configurations as indicated on Drawings and otherwise required for proper installation; make with lines straight and angles sharp, clean and true; drill, countersink, tap, and otherwise prepare items for connections with work of other trades, as required. Fabricate to detail of structural shapes, plates and bars; weld joints where practicable; provide bolts and other connection devices required. Include anchorages; clip angles, sleeves, anchor plates, and similar devices. Hot dipped galvanize after fabrication items installed in exterior locations. Set accurately in position as required and anchor securely to building construction. Construct items with joints formed for strength and rigidity, accurately machining for proper fit; where exposed to weather, form to exclude water.
2. Finishes:
a. Ferrous Metal: After fabrication, but before erection, clean surfaces by mechanical or chemical methods to remove rust, scale, oil, corrosion, or other substances detrimental to bonding of subsequently applied protective coatings. For metal items exposed to weather or moisture, galvanize in manner to obtain G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide other non-galvanized ferrous metal with one coat of approved rust-resisting paint primer, in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness. Touch-up damaged areas in primer with same material, before installation. Apply zinc coatings and paint primers uniformly and smoothly; leave ready for finish painting as specified elsewhere. b. Metal in contact with Concrete, Masonry and Other Dissimilar Materials: Where metal items are to be erected in contact with dissimilar materials, provide contact surfaces with coating of an approved zinc-chromate primer in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness, in addition to other coatings specified in these specifications.
c. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
3.2 ANCHORS, THREADED ROD, AND FASTENERS INSTALLATION
A. Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for equipment installed.
Supports to withstand four times the weight of equipment it supports.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 669
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-5
B. Do not use other trade's fastening devices as supporting means for luminaires, equipment or materials.
C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
D. Do not use supports or fastening devices to support other than one particular item.
E. Securely suspend junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located above suspended ceiling from floor above or roof structure to prevent sagging and swaying.
F. Provide seismic bracing per CBC requirements.
G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
H. Use spring lock washers under fastener nuts for strut.
I. Cutting and Drilling
1. Do not drill or cut structural members without prior permission from Architect.
3.3 SUPPORT CHANNEL, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B. Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for equipment installed.
Supports to withstand four times the weight of equipment it supports.
C. Verify mounting height of luminaires prior to installation when heights are not detailed.
D. Install vertical support members for equipment and luminaires, straight and parallel to building walls.
E. Install horizontal support members straight and parallel to ceilings or finished floor unless otherwise noted.
F. Provide independent supports to structural member for luminaires, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls or in void spaces or over suspended ceilings.
G. Do not use other trade's fastening devices as supporting means for luminaires, equipment or materials.
H. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
I. Do not use supports or fastening devices to support other than one particular item.
J. Support conduits within 18-inches of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets and deflections unless more stringently required by CEC.
K. Maximum distance between supports not to exceed 8 foot spacing unless otherwise required by CEC.
L. Support flexible conduits within 12-inches of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets and deflections unless otherwise required by CEC.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 670
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-6
M. Maximum distance between supports for flexible conduits not to exceed 48-inches spacing unless otherwise required by CEC.
N. Maximum distance between supports for rigid PVC conduits unless otherwise required by CEC is as follows:
1. 1/2-inch or 3/4-inch and 1-inch conduit, 3-feet apart.
2. 1-1/4-inch or 1-1/2-inch and 2-inch conduit, 4-feet apart.
3. 2-1/2-inch and 3-inch conduit, 5-feet apart.
4. 4-inch and 5-inch conduit, 6-feet apart.
5. 6-inch conduit, 7-feet apart.
O. Install strut hangers as instructed by strut manufacturer. Suspend strut hangers as instructed by strut manufacturer for the load, with a maximum spacing of 8-feet on center and within 2-feet of outlet box, cabinet, junction box or other channel raceway termination unless otherwise required by CEC.
P. Securely suspend junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located above suspended ceiling from floor above or roof structure to prevent sagging and swaying.
Q. Provide seismic bracing per CBC requirements.
R. Where service disconnects are mounted on building exterior, physically attach service disconnect to the building or structure served.
S. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
T. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
3.4 ROOFTOP CONDUIT SUPPORTS INSTALLATION
A. Consult roofing manufacturer for roof membrane compression capacities. If necessary, provide a compatible sheet of roofing material (rubber pad) under rooftop support to disperse concentrated loads and add further membrane protection.
B. Do not use supports that will void roof warranty.
C. Install supports per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
D. Use properly sized clamps to suit conduit sizes.
E. Install supports for rooftop raceways to raise raceways a minimum of 7/8-inches above the roof structure unless otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 671
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-1
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC)
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
3. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)
4. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC)
5. Conduit Fittings
B. Provide a complete system of conduit and fittings, with associated couplings, connectors, and fittings, as shown on Drawings and described in these Specifications.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. In addition, reference the following:
1. Section 26 05 29, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems and Equipment
2. Section 26 05 34, Boxes
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. Raceway system is defined as consisting of conduit, tubing, duct, and fittings including but not limited to connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, bushings, expansion/deflection fittings, and other components and accessories. Complete electrical raceway installation before starting the installation of conductors and cables.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 672
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC):
1. Allied Tube & Conduit
2. Beck Manufacturing Inc.
3. Picoma
4. Wheatland Tube Company
5. Or approved equivalent.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1. Allied Tube & Conduit
2. Beck Manufacturing WL
3. Picoma
4. Wheatland Tube Company
5. Or approved equivalent.
C. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC):
1. AFC Cable Systems Inc.
2. Electri-Flex Company
3. International Metal Hose
4. Or approved equivalent.
D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC):
1. AFC Cable Systems Inc.
2. Electri-Flex Company
3. International Metal Hose
4. Or approved equivalent.
E. Conduit Fittings:
1. Bushings:
a. Insulated Type for Threaded Raceway Without Factory Installed Plastic Throat Conductor Protection:
1) Thomas & Betts 1222 Series
2) O-Z Gedney B Series
3) Or approved Equivalent.
2. Raceway Connectors and Couplings:
a. Thomas & Betts Series
b. O-Z Gedney Series
c. Or approved Equivalent.
3. Expansion/Deflection Fittings:
a. EMT: O-Z Gedney Type TX
b. RMC: O-Z Gedney Type AX, DX and AXDX, Crouse & Hinds XD c. PVC: O-Z Gedney Type DX with PVC adapters, Carlon E945 Series, Kraloy OPEJ Series
d. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. UL 6, ANSI C80.1. Hot dipped galvanized steel conduit after thread cutting.
1. Fittings: NEMA FB2.10.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 673
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-3
2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: UL 797, ANSI C80.3; steel galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; steel, compression type.
2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Description: UL 1, interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 2.20.
2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Description: UL 360, inner core made from spiral wound strip of heavy gauge, hot dipped galvanized low carbon steel. 3/4-inch through 1-1/4-inch trade sizes to have a square lock core and contain an integral bonding strip of copper. 1-1/2-inch and larger to have fully interlocked core. Jacket material to be moisture, oil, and sunlight resistant flexible PVC.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 2.20.
2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Bushings:
1. Insulated type for threaded raceway connectors without factory-installed plastic throat conductor protection.
2. Insulated grounding type for threaded raceway connectors.
B. Raceway Connectors and Couplings:
1. Steel connectors, couplings, and conduit bodies, hot-dip galvanized.
2. Connector locknuts to be steel, with threads meeting ASTM tolerances. Locknuts to be hot-dip galvanized.
3. Connector throats (EMT, flexible conduit, metal clad cable and cordset connectors) to have factory installed plastic inserts permanently installed. For normal cable or conductor exiting angles from raceway, the cable jacket or conductor insulation to bear only on plastic throat insert.
4. Steel gland, Tomic or Breagle connectors and couplings are recognized for this Contract as having acceptable raceway to fitting electrical conductance.
5. Set screw connectors and couplings, without integral compression glands, are recognized for this Contract as not having acceptable raceway to fitting electrical conductance. A ground conductor sized per this Specification must be included and bonded within raceway assembly utilizing this type connector or coupling.
C. Provide expansion/deflection fittings for EMT or RMC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Finished Surfaces: Schedule raceway installation to avoid conflict with installed wall and ceiling surfaces. If unavoidable, coordinate work and repairs with Architect.
B. Conduit Size:
1. Minimum Size: 3/4-inch for power and control, unless otherwise noted.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 674
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-4
C. Provide two pull strings/tapes in empty conduits. Types:
1. High-strength, stretch resistant, woven polyester. Factory lubricated to reduce burnthrough.
2. Feeders: 5/8-inch, 1,800-pound rated, Greenlee 4436, Mule Tape, Herculine, or approved equivalent.
3. Branch Circuits: 1/2-inch, 1,250-pound rated, Greenlee 4435, Mule Tape, Herculine, or approved equivalent.
4. If fish tape is used for pulling line, fiberglass type to be used. Metal fish tapes not allowed.
5. Secure pull string/tape with minimum 6-feet extended at each end.
6. Install pull string/tape after conduit is joined and glue is dry.
7. Provide caps on ends of empty conduit to be used in future.
8. Label both ends of empty conduits with location of opposite end.
D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
E. Plan locations of conduit runs in advance of the installation and coordinate with ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas.
F. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
G. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system.
H. Install raceways securely, in neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
I. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101, Standard for Installing Steel Conduits.
J. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
K. Conduit Supports:
1. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
2. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
3. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel.
Provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
4. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports.
5. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
L. Flexible metal conduit length not-to-exceed 6-feet, 3-feet in concealed walls. Provide sufficient slack to reduce the effect of vibration.
M. Install conduit seals at boundaries where ambient temperatures differ by 10 degrees F or more as shown on the drawings. Install seals on warm side of partition.
N. Use suitable caps on spare and empty conduits to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
O. Keep 277/480 volt wiring independent of 120/208 volt wiring. Keep power wiring independent of communication system wiring.
P. Keep emergency system wiring independent of other wiring systems per NEC 700.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 675
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-5
Q. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
R. Exposed conduits are permitted only in following areas:
1. Mechanical rooms, electrical rooms or spaces where walls, ceilings and floors will not be covered with finished material.
2. Existing walls that are concrete or block construction.
3. Where specifically noted on Drawings.
4. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls, tight to finished surfaces and neatly offset into boxes.
S. Do not install conduits or other electrical equipment in obvious passages, doorways, scuttles or crawl spaces which would impede or block area passage's intended usage.
T. Install continuous conduit and raceways for electrical power wiring.
U. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
V. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
W. Keep conduits a minimum of 12-inches away from steam or hot water radiant heating lines (at or above 104 degrees F) or 3-inches away from waste or water lines.
X. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; deburr cut ends.
Y. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
Z. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes in damp and wet locations.
AA. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams.
BB. Use factory elbows bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size.
CC. Avoid moisture traps.
DD. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control, and expansion joints.
EE. Feeders: Do not combine or change feeder runs.
FF. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.
GG. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation and installer.
3.2 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) INSTALLATION
A. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: RMC.
B. Damp Locations: RMC.
C. In areas exposed to mechanical damage: RMC.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 676
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-6
D. For security conduits installed exposed and subject to tampering: RMC.
3.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) INSTALLATION
A. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: EMT.
2. Exposed: EMT.
B. Dry, Protected: EMT.
3.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) INSTALLATION
A. Dry Locations: Motors, recessed luminaires and equipment connections subject to movement or vibration, use flexible metallic conduit.
B. Install 12-inch minimum slack loop on flexible metallic conduit.
3.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) INSTALLATION A. Use PVC coated liquidtight flexible metallic conduit for motors and equipment connections subject to movement or vibration and subjected to any of following conditions: Exterior location, moist or humid atmosphere, corrosive environments, water spray, oil, or grease.
B. Install 12-inch minimum slack loop on liquidtight flexible metallic conduit.
3.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Joints: Assemble conduits continuous and secure to boxes, panels, luminaires and equipment with fittings to maintain continuity. Provide watertight joints where embedded in concrete, below grade or in damp locations. Seal metal conduit with metal thread primer. Rigid conduit connections to be threaded, clean and tight (metal to metal). Threadless connections are not permitted for RMC.
B. Use set screw type fittings only in dry locations. When set screw fittings are utilized provide insulated continuous equipment ground conductor in conduit, from overcurrent protection device to outlet.
C. Use compression fittings in dry locations, damp and rain-exposed locations. Maximum size permitted in damp locations and locations exposed to rain is 2-inches in diameter.
D. Use threaded type fittings in wet locations, and damp or rain-exposed locations where conduit size is greater than 2-inches.
E. Condulets and Conduit Bodies:
1. Do not use condulets and conduit bodies in conduits in feeders 100 amp and larger.
F. Sleeves and Chases - Floor, Ceiling and Wall Penetrations: Provide necessary conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required to pass through floors, ceilings, or walls.
G. Expansion Joints:
1. Provide conduits crossing expansion joints where cast in concrete with expansiondeflection fittings, installed per manufacturer's recommendations.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 677
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-7
2. Secure conduits 3-inches and larger to building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint with an expansion-deflection fitting across joint installed per manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Provide conduits less than 3-inches where not cast in concrete with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of expansion joint, connected together with 15-inches of slack (minimum of 15-inches longer than straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. In lieu of this flexible conduit, an expansion-deflection fitting, as indicated for conduits 3-inch and larger may be installed.
4. Verify expansion/deflection requirements with Structural Engineer prior to installation.
H. Seismic Joints:
1. No conduits cast in concrete allowed to cross seismic joint.
2. Provide conduits with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of seismic joint, connected together with 15-inches of slack (minimum of 15-inches longer than straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. Prior to installation, verify with Architect that 15-inches is adequate for designed movement, and if not, increase this length as required.
3. Provide conduits less than 3-inches where not cast in concrete with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of expansion joint, connected together with 15-inches of slack (minimum of 15-inches longer than straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. In lieu of this flexible conduit, an expansion-deflection fitting, as indicated for conduits 3-inches and larger may be installed.
I. Provide rigid conduit coupling flush with surface of slab or wall for conduit stubbed in concrete slab or wall to serve electrical equipment or an outlet under table or to supply shop tool, etc.
Provide plug where conduit is to be used in future.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 678
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-1
SECTION 26 05 34
BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Outlet Boxes
2. Junction Boxes
3. Box Extension Adapter
4. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes
B. Provide electrical boxes and fittings for a complete installation. Include but not limited to outlet boxes, junction boxes, bushings, locknuts and other necessary components.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. In addition, reference the following:
1. Section 26 05 33, Raceways
2. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Outlet Boxes:
1. Hubbell
2. Thomas & Betts
3. Eaton/Crouse-Hinds
4. Or approved equivalent.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 679
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-2
B. Junction Boxes:
1. Eaton/Crouse-Hinds
2. Hoffman
3. Or approved equivalent.
C. Box Extension Adapter:
1. Hubbell
2. Thomas & Betts
3. Eaton/Crouse-Hinds
4. Or approved equivalent.
D. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes:
1. Legrand (Pass & Seymour)
2. Hubbell
3. Thomas & Betts
4. Eaton/Crouse-Hinds
5. Intermatic
6. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 OUTLET BOXES
A. Luminaire Outlet: 4-inch octagonal box, 1-1/2-inches deep with 3/8-inch luminaire stud if required. Provide raised covers on bracket outlets and on ceiling outlets.
B. Device Outlet: Installation of one or two devices at common location, minimum 4-inches square, minimum 1-1/2-inches deep for non-USB type devices. Installation of one or two devices at common locations, minimum 4-inches square, minimum 2-inches deep for USB type devices.
Single- or two-gang flush device raised covers.
C. Multiple Devices: Three or more devices at common location. Install one-piece gang boxes with one-piece device cover. Install one device per gang.
D. Construction: For interior locations, provide galvanized steel outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. All surface mounted outlet boxes are to be drawn.
Welded boxes are not acceptable.
E. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, luminaire studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations.
F. Noise Control: Provide acoustic putty pad to back side of each outlet box installed in acoustic rated walls.
2.3 JUNCTION BOXES
A. Construction: Provide ANSI 61 gray polyester powder painted sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of type shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.
B. Location:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 680
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-3
1. Provide junction boxes above accessible ceilings for drops into walls for receptacle outlets from overhead.
2. Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate installation of conductors and limiting accumulated angular sum of bends between boxes, cabinets and appliances to 270 degrees.
2.4 BOX EXTENSION ADAPTER
A. Construction: Diecast aluminum.
B. Location: Install over flush wall outlet boxes to permit flexible raceway extension from flush outlet to fixed or movable equipment.
2.5 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES
A. Construction: Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal faceplate with spring-hinged waterproof cap suitably configured for each application, including faceplate, gasket, blank plugs and corrosion proof fasteners. Weatherproof boxes to be constructed to have smooth sides, gray finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate locations of floor boxes and wall mounted wiring device boxes with architectural and structural floor plans prior to rough-in.
B. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1, Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
C. Secure boxes rigidly to substrate upon which they are being mounted.
D. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NEC. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.
E. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights shown on Architectural Elevations.
F. Electrical boxes are shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
1. Adjust box locations up to 10-feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
G. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.
H. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
I. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
J. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12-inches of box.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 681
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-4
K. Box Color Coding and Marking: Reference Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.
L. Adjust boxes to be parallel with building lines. Boxes not plumb to building lines are not acceptable.
M. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
N. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
O. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
3.2 OUTLET BOXES INSTALLATION
A. Mount outlet boxes, unless otherwise required by ADA, or noted on Drawings, following distances above finished floor:
1. Control Switches:
a. 48-inches to the top of outlet box.
b. 4-inches above top of backsplash at countertops/workstations, not to exceed 44- inches above finished floor to the top of outlet box, per ADA requirements.
2. Receptacles:
a. 15-inches to the bottom of outlet box.
b. 4-inches above top of backsplash at countertops/workstations, not to exceed 44- inches above finished floor to the top of outlet box, per ADA requirements.
3. Telecom Outlets:
a. Match height of adjacent receptacle.
b. 15-inches to the bottom of outlet box.
c. 4-inches above top of backsplash at countertops/workstations, not to exceed 44- inches above finished floor to the top of outlet box, per ADA standards.
4. Other Outlets: As indicated in other sections of Specifications or as detailed on Drawings.
B. Flush Outlets in Insulated Spaces: Maintain integrity of insulation and vapor barrier.
C. Coordinate electrical device locations and elevations (switches and receptacles) with architectural drawings to prevent mounting devices in mirrors, back splashes, and behind cabinets.
D. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
E. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
Adjacent boxes not aligned vertically to be adjusted at no additional cost to Owner.
F. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6-inches separation.
Provide minimum 24-inches in acoustic rated walls.
H. In acoustical walls, apply acoustic putty pad on outlet box prior to installation of acoustical blanket.
I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 682
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-5
K. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
L. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
M. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
N. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
3.3 JUNCTION BOXES INSTALLATION
A. Install junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
B. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
3.4 BOX EXTENSION ADAPTER INSTALLATION
A. Match material to box.
B. Install gaskets at exterior and wet locations.
3.5 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES INSTALLATION
A. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to weather and wet locations.
B. Install gaskets.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 683
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Device Labels
2. Wire Markers
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals not required for this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required.
2. Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 26, Electrical Sections. Where more than a single type is specified for application, provide single selection for each product category.
3. Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices unless otherwise indicated.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Device Labels:
1. Kroy
2. Brady
3. Or approved equivalent.
B. Wire Markers:
1. Brady
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 684
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-2
2. Panduit
3. Sumitomo
4. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 DEVICE LABELS
A. Extra strength, laminated adhesive tape with 3/16-inch black letters on clear background.
Embossed tape/punch tape style labels are not acceptable.
B. Receptacles: Indicate source panel and source circuits (e.g. xxx-xx).
C. Wall Switches/Control Device Stations:
1. Where controls are provided for remote lighting or power outlets, or where controls in same location serve different purposes or areas, such as corridor and outside, provide device label indicating function of each control device.
2. Label the function of control devices where two or more are mounted in same location and control function may be unclear.
3. Wall switches with engraved buttons do not require labeling.
D. Junction Boxes: Label to show system identification, source circuit, or raceway origin. In finished areas, utilize device label. In unfinished areas or above ceilings, use of permanent ink marker is acceptable.
E. Panel and circuit designation written in permanent marker on the back of the plate and inside all back-boxes and junction boxes.
2.3 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Vinyl-cloth self-adhesive type wire markers.
B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and each load connection.
C. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on drawings and source panel.
D. Control Circuits: control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on drawings or shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate designations used on Drawings with equipment nameplates and device labels.
B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.
C. Identify empty conduit and boxes with intended use.
D. Provide typewritten branch panel schedules with protective clear transparent covers accounting for every breaker installed. Use actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work, and not the designations shown on Drawings.
E. Where changes are made in existing panels, distribution boards, etc., provide new labeling and typewritten schedules to accurately reflect the changes.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 685
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-3
3.2 DEVICE LABELS
A. Reference General Installation Requirements above.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive labels. Fingers to be regularly cleaned of grease and debris to prevent fingerprints on labels. Labels installed dirty or with fingerprints to be replaced at no cost to Owner.
3.3 WIRE MARKERS
A. Reference General Installation Requirements above.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Provide wire markers on each conductor for power, control, signalling and communications circuits.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 686
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BUILDING LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND
DOCUMENTATION 26 08 10-1
SECTION 26 08 10
BUILDING LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Duties of the Team
2. Time Schedule
3. Acceptance Testing - Phase I - Documentation
4. Acceptance Testing - Phase II - Inspection and Testing
5. Acceptance Testing - Phase III - Certification
B. This Section describes the acceptance testing and documentation of the lighting system(s) and outlines the duties and responsibilities of the contracting team for acceptance testing.
C. Supply the acceptance requirements to products, equipment and systems provided under this Division, where indicated on Drawings, and where required by California Title 24 requirements.
D. Engage the services of a firm specializing in commissioning of lighting systems or submit contractor qualifications for review by architect where testing and documentation is to be performed by contractor.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. Form the Commissioning Team of:
1. Electrical Contractor's Representative
2. Lighting Controls Manufacturer's Representative
3. Inspector of Record
4. Owner's Staff Representative
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 687
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BUILDING LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND
DOCUMENTATION 26 08 10-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUTIES OF THE TEAM
A. The duties of the Team are as outlined in the California Title 24 requirements and summarized below:
1. Plan, organize, and implement the acceptance testing process and within one month of the award of the contract; submit the names and addresses of the Testing team member(s).
2. The acceptance testing team to submit a complete description of the testing procedures and systems to be tested to the architect for review.
3. The acceptance testing team to coordinate tests of systems and equipment and assemble documentation related to tests. Submit documentation relative to tests and proposed procedures to design engineer for review prior to submitting documentation to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Team responsible for performing data analysis, calculation of performance indices and cross-checking of results with the requirements of California Title 24 and the Contract documents. The installing contractor or agent responsible for testing and documentation to record their State of California Contractor's license number, or their State of California Professional Registration License number on each Certificate of Acceptance for submittal.
4. Responsible for submitting Certificate of Acceptance including paper and electronic copies of measurements and monitoring results and supporting documentation to the AHJ. Where AHJ questions results or requires additional testing, complete additional testing and provide required documentation at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 TIME SCHEDULE
A. Determine the time period of the commissioning of the systems by the general contractor and acceptance testing team. It is important to note that AHJ will not release a final Certificate of Occupancy until a Certificate of Acceptance is submitted that demonstrates that the specified systems and equipment have been shown to be performing in accordance with the State of California standards.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING - PHASE I - DOCUMENTATION
A. Team to assemble documentation showing lighting fixture locations, lighting control device locations, control sequences and notes.
B. Per State of California requirements, team to provide record drawings to building Owner within 90 days of receiving a final occupancy permit (reference other specification Sections for requirements on record drawings).
C. Per State of California requirements, team to provide operating and maintenance manuals to the building Owner (reference other specification Sections for requirements on operation and maintenance manuals).
3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING - PHASE II - INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Team to review the installation, perform acceptance testing and document results for the following systems:
1. Occupancy Sensors
2. Automatic Daylight Controls
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 688
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BUILDING LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND
DOCUMENTATION 26 08 10-3
B. Review of installation to confirm lighting fixtures and lighting controls are properly located, identified, calibrated, and set points and schedules programmed per contract document requirements.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING - PHASE III - CERTIFICATION
A. Team to document operating and maintenance information, complete installation certificate, and indicate test results on the Certificate of Acceptance, and submit the Certificate to the AHJ prior to receiving final occupancy permit.
B. Team to submit NRCA-LTI and NRCA-LTO forms as required by California Title 24 requirements.
3.6 ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND DOCUMENTATION
A. Reference State of California requirements for specific testing procedures and documentation requirements. Contractor is responsible for reviewing and complying with standards as required by Division 01, General Requirements and Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements as well as State and governmental standards related to this work.
B. Reference California Title 24, 2022 Nonresidential Compliance Manual and Documents for specific testing procedures and documentation requirements. Contractor is responsible for reviewing and complying with these standards. The detailed requirements can be found at:
https://www.energy.ca.gov/programs-and-topics/programs/building-energy-efficiencystandards/2022-building-energy-efficiency.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 689
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-1
SECTION 26 09 25
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work included:
1. General Performance
2. Digital Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensor System
3. Digital Wall Switches
4. Room Controllers
5. Digital Photosensors
6. Room Network (DLM Local Network)
7. Configuration Tools
B. System Description and Operation:
1. The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the following equipment:
a. Digital Room Controllers: Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two, or three relays controllers with 0-10 volt control for LED drivers (if applicable) and single relay application-specific plug load controllers.
b. Digital Occupancy Sensors: Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications.
c. Digital Switches: Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications. d. Digital Photosensors: Single-zone closed loop and multi-zone open loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching or dimming control for daylighting harvesting. e. Configuration Tools: Handheld remote for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device/room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow send and receive of room variables and store of occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings.
f. Room Network - Digital Lighting Management (DLM) Local Network: Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices.
C. Lighting Control Applications:
1. Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum application of lighting controls as follows:
a. Space Control Requirements: Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with ManualON functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic-ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate. Provide Manual-ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, open plan system and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line-ofsight may be obscured, provide ceiling-or corner-mounted sensors and Manual-ON switches.
b. Daylit areas: All luminaires within 15-feet of windows or within 7-feet of skylights (the daylit zones) will be controlled separately from luminaires outside of daylit zones. Luminaires closest to the daylight aperture will be controlled separately from luminaires farther from the daylight aperture, within the daylight zone.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 690
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-2
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 01, General Requirements and Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Layout of sensors indicating their sensing distribution on reproducible Architectural Floor Plans.
2. Shop Drawings: Provide wiring diagrams indicating low voltage and line voltage wiring requirements for occupancy sensors, and each digital lighting control system shown on the electrical drawings.
3. Closeout Submittals:
a. Sustainable Design Closeout Documentation: Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide Enhanced Start-up documentation that details the start-up procedure being performed including a process to follow, details on tests performed and an area that documents any test results.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of architectural lighting controls.
2. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standard, including in-house engineering for product design activities.
3. Lighting Control System Components: Listed by UL specifically for the required loads.
Provide evidence of compliance upon request.
4. Prior to adjusting and calibrating daylighting control system and local photocell field adjustable settings, contact local manufacturer representative and arrange for representative to visit site to educate both field installer and Owner's Authorized Representative on the operation of the controls.
5. Use manufacturer's published testing and adjusting procedures to adjust sensors time delay, daylight sensitivity, and passive infrared sensitivity to satisfaction of Owner.
6. Training: Provide minimum 4-hour training session to Owner's Authorized Representatives at a time approved by Owner after Owner has received approved operation and maintenance manuals. Training to include discussion of operation, adjustment, and replacement of sensors, photocells and control.
7. Prepare and complete report of test procedures and results. Submit these test procedures and results to Owner.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 691
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wattstopper DLM Series
B. Or approved equivalent.
C. Basis of Design: Daylighting and occupancy sensor layout on Drawings are designed based on Wattstopper product line. Approved manufacturers listed below are allowed on condition of meeting specified conditions including complete sensor coverage of area controlled and switching of luminaires in area controlled. Provide additional sensors and room controllers as needed to provide same level of functionality as shown on Drawings. Remove and replace electrical equipment installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner.
2.2 GENERAL PERFORMANCE
A. Daylight Harvesting and Occupant Detection to Control Lighting with the Following Hierarchy:
1. Emergency (Highest Priority): Ignores all other inputs.
2. Programming: During system programming, sensor inputs are ignored.
3. Occupant Sensor: Allows lights to be on/off.
4. Daylight Sensor: Imposes a high end limit for light output.
B. Response to a single sensor can be unique on luminaire by luminaire basis.
C. Power failure recovery - All devices return to their previous light level prior to power loss.
D. All programmable devices with integral power failure memory to maintain settings for a minimum of 10 hours during power loss.
E. Wall station and sensor replacement accomplished without programming.
2.3 DIGITAL CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM
A. Ceiling mounted (to suit installation) dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the system accommodating the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors, and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.
B. Digital Occupancy Sensors will provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:
1. Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:
a. Sensitivity: 0-100 percent in 10 percent increments. b. Time delay: 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments.
c. Test mode: Five second time delay.
d. Detection technology: PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or reactivation. e. Walk-through mode.
f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.
2. Two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.
3. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.
4. Device Status LEDs including:
a. PIR Detection.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 692
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-4
b. Ultrasonic detection.
c. Configuration mode.
d. Load binding.
5. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.
6. Manual override of controlled loads.
C. Units will not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.
D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.
2.4 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES
A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, and 4 button configuration; available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.
Wall switches will include the following:
1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.
2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.
3. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.
4. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:
a. Bi-level LED.
b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch.
c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active.
5. Dimming switches will include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.
B. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.
C. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi-way switching.
D. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:
1. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).
2. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only, or Off only.
3. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.
4. Fade Up and Face Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.
5. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.
6. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads.
2.5 ROOM CONTROLLERS
A. Room controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features:
1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 693
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-5
2. Simple replacement - Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup.
3. Device Status LEDs to indicate:
a. Data transmission.
b. Device has power.
c. Status for each load.
d. Configuration status.
4. Quick installation features including:
a. Standard junction box mounting.
b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable.
5. Plenum rated.
6. Manual override and LED indication for each load.
7. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz).
8. Zero cross circuitry for each load.
B. On/Off Room Controllers are to include:
1. One or two relay configuration.
2. Efficient 150 mA switching power supply.
3. Three RJ-45 DLM local network ports.
C. On/Off/Dimming Enhanced Room Controllers are to include:
1. Real time current monitoring.
2. Three relay configuration.
3. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply.
4. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.
5. One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible LED drivers.
6. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:
a. Establish preset level for each load from 0-100 percent. b. Set high and low trim for each load.
7. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space.
a. One relay configuration only.
b. Automatic ON/OFF configuration.
2.6 DIGITAL PHOTOSENSORS
A. Digital photosensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Closed loop photosensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones. Photosensors are to be interchangeable without the need for rewiring.
B. Digital photosensors include the following features:
1. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode is not to measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell is to have a sensitivity of less than 5 percent for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.
2. Sensor light level range to be from 1-200 footcandles (fc).
3. The capability of switching one-third, one-half or all lighting ON and OFF, or raising or lowering lighting levels, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s).
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 694
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-6
4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor is to provide a deadband or a separation between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that will prevent the lights from cycling after they turn off.
5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor is to provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a userselectable minimum level.
6. Programmable wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise and lower lighting levels for a selected period of time or cycle of occupancy.
7. Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls.
8. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission.
9. Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.
10. Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.
11. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.
12. An adjustable head and a mounting bracket to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensor may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox.
C. Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features:
1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.
2. Automatically establishes setpoints following calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.
3. A proportional control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a “Setpoint” to be maintained during operation.
2.7 ROOM NETWORK (DLM LOCAL NETWORK)
A. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room devices connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network include:
1. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.
2. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.
3. Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network.
2.8 CONFIGURATION TOOLS
A. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks, and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.
B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool to include:
1. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet.
2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 695
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-7
3. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers, and buttons on digital wall switches.
4. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.
5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s)on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting.
6. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-commissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and Contract Documents.
B. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any additional equipment required to provide control intent.
C. Install photocells as directed by manufacturer's instructions. Complete connections to control circuits, photocells, control modules, power supply pack and low voltage wiring.
D. Verify with manufacturer's representative that sensors and photocells are laid out in compliance to manufacturer's published sensing distribution. Provide additional sensors for complete coverage of space being sensed.
E. Photocell Placement and Wiring:
1. Drawings are schematic, and show photocell quantities together with the daylighting zones that they control.
2. Reference manufacturer installation instructions for the recommended location and orientation of photocell with respect to exterior glazing and both interior and exterior lighting.
3. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources; ceiling mounted and fixture-mounted daylight sensors are not to have direct view of luminaries.
4. Reposition sensor at no additional cost to Owner to avoid conflict between sensor and object obscuring its view, and between sensor and both interior and exterior lighting that causes daylighting controls to repeatedly increase and decrease in brightness (i.e., "cycling").
5. Field wire photocell for correct footcandle range.
F. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment:
1. Ambient temperature: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
2. Relative Humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
G. Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation.
H. Prior to applying continuous dimming daylighting controls, maintain LED lighting at full output for a minimum of 100 hours. If this is not done, replace lamps and drivers of affected luminaires at no cost to Owner.
I. Use manufacturer’s published testing and adjusting procedures to adjust sensor time delay, daylight sensitivity, and passive infrared sensitivity to satisfaction of Owner.
J. Systems Integration:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 696
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-8
1. Equipment Integration Meeting Visit: Owner's Authorized Representative to coordinate meeting with Lighting Control System Manufacturer and other related equipment manufacturers to discuss equipment and integration procedures.
3.2 STARTUP AND PROGRAMMING
A. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to ensure proper system installation and operation under following parameters:
1. Qualifications for Factory-Certified Field Service Engineer:
a. Minimum experience of two years training in the electrical/electronic field. b. Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed.
2. Site Visit Activities:
a. Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.
b. Verify connection of controls.
c. Verify system operation control by control, circuit by circuit. d. Obtain sign-off on system functions.
e. Demonstrate and educate Owner’s Authorized Representative on system capabilities, operation and maintenance.
B. Tech Support: Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, seven days per week.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer Services:
1. Aim and Focus Visit: Facility Representative to coordinate on-site meeting with Lighting Control System Manufacturer and Lighting Design Consultant to make required lighting adjustments to the system for conformance with the Lighting Design Consultant’s original design intent.
3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Training Visit: Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide one day additional on-site system training to site personnel no less than two months after Substantial Completion, separate from start-up and programming visit.
B. On-Site Walk Through: Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide a factory certified Field Service Engineer to demonstrate system functionality to the Commissioning Agent.
C. Test lighting controls to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Provide functional testing of sequences of operation to ensure operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Provide complete report of test procedures and results to engineer and insert approved copy into project closeout documents.
D. Testing Includes:
1. Daylight automatic controls.
2. Occupant sensing automatic controls.
3. Automatic time and override controls for interior lighting.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 697
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of:
1. Receptacles
2. Finish Plates
3. Surface Covers
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Receptacles
2. Wall Plates
3. In-Use Cover
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Receptacles:
1. Commercial Grade:
a. 20 Amp:
1) Cooper
2) Hubbell
3) Bryant
4) Leviton
5) Legrand P&S
6) Or approved equivalent.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 698
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-2
2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Tamper-Resistant Receptacle - 20 Amp:
a. Cooper
b. Hubbell
c. Legrand P&S
d. Or approved equivalent.
B. Finish Plates:
1. Bryant
2. Cooper
3. Hubbell
4. Leviton
5. Legrand P&S
6. Or approved equivalent.
C. Surface Covers:
1. While-in-Use Weatherproof Outlet Cover:
a. Die Cast Cover:
1) Intermatic
2) Hubbell
3) Leviton
4) Cooper
5) Or approved equivalent.
D. Provide lighting switches and receptacles of common manufacturer and appearance.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex Receptacles Characteristics: Straight parallel blade, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding.
1. Commercial Grade: Riveted. Back and side wired. Brass ground contact on steel strap.
Nylon face and nylon base. 20 amp.
B. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacle: Feed through type, back-and-side wired, tamper-resistant, weather resistant self-testing, 20 amp, 125 VAC.
C. Finish:
1. Same exposed finish as switches.
2.3 FINISH PLATES
A. Finish Plates: Type 302 stainless steel with smooth satin finish.
2.4 SURFACE COVERS
A. Material: Galvanized steel, drawn, 1/2-inch raised industrial type with openings appropriate for devices installed on surface receptacles.
B. Cast Box and Extension Adaptors: Aluminum with gasket, blanks single-gang.
C. While-in-Use Weatherproof Cover: NEMA 3R when closed over energized plug. Vertical mount for duplex receptacle. Provide continuous use cover with cover capable of closing over energized cord cap with bottom aperture for cord exit.
1. Die cast cover with closed cell neoprene foam gasket: Capable of being locked closed to prevent tampering or unauthorized use.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 699
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. See Architectural elevations for location and mounting height of wiring devices. Review Architectural elevations prior to rough-in and contact Architect immediately if conflicts are found between Architectural and Electrical Drawings. Do not rough-in devices until conflicts are resolved.
B. Install wiring devices and finish plates plumb with building lines, equipment cabinets and adjacent devices. Devices not plumb will be fixed at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Orientation:
1. Install wiring devices with long dimension oriented vertically at centerline height shown on drawings or as specified.
2. Vertical Alignment: When more than one device is shown on Drawings in close proximity to each other, but at different elevations, align devices on a common vertical center line for best appearance. Verify with Architect.
3. Horizontal Alignment: When more than one device is shown on drawings in close proximity to each other with same elevation, align devices on a common horizontal center line for best appearance. Verify with Architect.
D. Provide labeling per Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.
E. Test wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections, and after energizing circuitry, to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test receptacles for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground faults. Correct any defective wiring.
3.2 RECEPTACLES INSTALLATION
A. Upon installation, adhere to proper and cautious use of convenience receptacles. At time of substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty receptacles or cord caps.
B. In the following outlet locations, regardless of whether shown as GFCI on Drawings, either provide a GFCI duplex receptacle, or use a GFCI breaker where code would require a GFCI outlet to have a remote test switch:
1. Bathrooms.
2. Where receptacles are installed within 6-feet, 0-inches from edge of sinks.
3. Kitchens above counters.
4. On rooftops.
5. Outdoors.
6. Where serving vending machines.
7. Where serving electric drinking fountains.
C. GFCI Receptacles: One GFCI receptacle may not be used to provide GFCI protection to downstream duplex receptacles on the same branch circuit.
3.3 FINISH PLATES INSTALLATION
A. Do not install items until finish painting is complete. Replace scratched and paint splattered finish plates and wiring devices.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 700
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-4
3.4 SURFACE COVERS INSTALLATION
A. Do not install items until finish painting is complete. Replace scratched and paint splattered finish plates and wiring devices.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 701
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-1
SECTION 26 28 16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Toggle Type Disconnect Switches
2. Safety Switches
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. In addition, reference the following:
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Toggle Type Disconnect Switches:
1. Cooper
2. Hubbell
3. Leviton
4. Legrand (Pass & Seymour)
5. Slater
6. Or approved equivalent.
B. Safety Switches:
1. Eaton Electrical
2. ABB/General Electric
3. Siemens
4. Schneider Electric/Square D
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 702
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-2
5. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 TOGGLE TYPE DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Rating: 120 volt, 1 or 2 pole, 20 amp, 1 hp maximum.
B. Enclosure:
1. NEMA 1: Dry locations/Indoors.
2. NEMA 3R: Damp or wet locations/Outdoors.
C. Handle lockable in "OFF" position.
2.3 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Heavy duty fusible type and non-fusible type (as indicated on drawings), dual rated, quickmake, quick-break with fuse rejection feature for use with Class R fuses only, unless other fuse type is specifically noted.
B. Clearly marked for maximum voltage, current, and horsepower.
C. Operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in 'on' position.
D. Switches rated for maximum available fault current.
E. Handle lockable in "OFF" position.
F. Enclosure:
1. NEMA 1: Dry locations/Indoors.
2. NEMA 3R: Damp or wet locations/Outdoors.
G. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Provide fuse rejection feature for Class R or J fuses up to 600 amp. Remove if circuit breaker type is used. Provide switches of 30 to 200 amp with plug-on line side connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Obtain and review the submitted product data for equipment furnished by the Owner, and furnished under other Divisions of this contract, particularly under Divisions 22 and 23.
B. Confirm the equipment nameplate maximum overcurrent protection (MOCP) and make accommodations and adjustments to switches, fuses and circuit breakers as necessary to coordinate with the nameplate rating.
C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide engraved nameplates per Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.
3.2 TOGGLE TYPE DISCONNECT SWITCHES INSTALLATION
A. Install products, systems and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 703
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-3
B. See General Installation Requirements above.
3.3 SAFETY SWITCHES INSTALLATION
A. Install products, systems and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. Coordinate fuse ampere rating with installed equipment. Do not provide fuses of lower ampere rating than the motor starter thermal units.
C. See General Installation Requirements above.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 704
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-1
SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Luminaires
2. LED Drivers
3. Lamps
B. Provide wiring for complete and operating lighting system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. NECA 500 - Commercial Lighting.
2. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) equipment for use in lighting products.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Submit product data for:
a. LED Luminaires: Electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, clearances, terminations, wiring, connection diagram, LM-79 photometric data, LM-80 lumen depreciation data.
b. LED Drivers
c. Lamps
2. Submittal Cutsheets: Highlight, circle or otherwise graphically indicate which option(s) are being selected for the products submitted. Cutsheets that are not edited to indicate which products and options are submitted for this project or that list only catalog numbers to identify submitted options are not acceptable.
3. Specified manufacturers are approved to submit bid. However, inclusion does not relieve manufacturer from supplying product as described.
4. Provide the following operating and maintenance instructions as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements:
a. Luminaires
b. LED Drivers
c. Lamps
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 705
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Provide luminaires acceptable to code authority for application and location installed.
2. Comply with applicable ANSI standards.
3. Comply with applicable NEMA standards.
4. Provide luminaires and lampholders that comply with UL standards and have been listed and labeled for location and use indicated by a testing agency acceptable by the AHJ (e.g., UL, ETL, and the like).
5. Comply with CEC as applicable to installation and construction of luminaires.
6. Comply with fallout and retention requirements of CBC for diffusers, baffles, and louvers.
7. Provide LED luminaires from the same manufacturer and manufacturing LED source batch for similar applications (e.g., all LED downlights from a single manufacturer and batch, all linear LED products from single manufacturer and batch).
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. LED Luminaire Manufacturer's Warranty: Not less than 5 years for luminaire based on date of substantial completion. Includes normal cost of labor to replace luminaire.
Replacement luminaire will match physical dimensions, physical appearance, chromaticity, lumen output and photometric characteristics of original installed equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Luminaires:
1. Reference description and manufacturers in Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.
2. Or approved equivalent.
B. LED Drivers:
1. Indoor Drivers:
a. eldoLED Series
b. Advance/Philips
c. Osram Sylvania
d. Or approved equivalent.
2. Outdoor Drivers:
a. Advance/Philips
b. Osram Sylvania
c. LG
d. Or approved equivalent.
C. Lamps:
1. LED (Light Emitting Diode) Lamps:
a. Nichia
b. Cree
c. Osram Sylvania
d. GE Lumination
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 706
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-3
e. Or approved equivalent.
2. Unless specific manufacturer not shown on this list is indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.
3. Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
4. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Luminaires: Reference description and manufacturers in Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.
B. Where recessed luminaires are installed in cavities intended to be insulated, provide IC rated luminaires or other code approved installation.
C. UL label luminaires installed under canopies, roof or open porches, and similar damp or wet locations, as suitable for damp or wet location.
D. Recessed Luminaires: Frame compatible with ceiling material installed at particular luminaire location. Provide proper factory trim and frame for luminaire to fit location and ceiling material.
Verify with Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan prior to submittals.
E. Finishes:
1. Manufacturer's standard finish (unless otherwise indicated) over corrosion resistant primer.
2. Interior Light Reflecting Finishes: White or specular finish with not less than 85 percent reflectance.
3. Exterior Finishes: As detailed in Luminaire Schedule or on Drawings. Refer cases of uncertain applicability to Architect for resolution prior to release for fabrication.
F. Light Transmitting Components:
1. Plastic diffusers, molded or extruded of 100 percent virgin acrylic.
2. Prismatic acrylic, extruded, flat diffusers, 0.125-inch overall thickness, unless otherwise noted.
G. LED Luminaires:
1. UL listing of luminaire includes drivers, transformers, enclosures, rated wire, communications devices and accessories needed for a complete and functional system.
2. LM-79: Testing and measurement of absolute photometry, chromaticity (CCT) and luminaire power. Report provided by DOE certified independent testing laboratory. CCT as specified in Luminaire Schedule.
3. Standards: ANSI C78.377, LM-79 and LM-82 compliant for performance characteristics, photometry, colorimetry, efficacy and thermal characteristics.
4. LM-80 + TM-21: Testing and measurement, and statistical prediction of LED lamp life.
Report provided by DOE certified independent testing laboratory.
5. LEDs in one module/luminaire: Supplied from same batch/bin and fall within 3-step MacAdam Ellipse, or as described in Luminaire Schedule, whichever is the more stringent requirement.
6. Provide luminaires with integral LED thermal management system (heat sinking).
7. Luminaires to be equipped with an LED driver that accepts 120V through 277V, 50Hz to 60Hz (universal). Component-to-component wiring within the luminaire will carry no more than 80 percent of rated current and be listed by UL for use at 600VAC at 302 degrees F/150 degrees C or higher. Plug disconnects to be listed by UL for use at 600VAC, 15A or higher.
8. Provide luminaires with individual LED arrays/modules and drivers that are accessible and replaceable from exposed side of the luminaire.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 707
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-4
2.3 LED DRIVERS
A. General:
1. Performance: Meet dimming range called out in Luminaire Schedule, free from perceived flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible steps in transitions), natural square law response to control input, and stable when input voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experienced in a commercial environment. Demonstration of this compliance to dimming performance will be necessary for substitutions or prior approval.
2. Ten-year expected life while operating at maximum case temperature and 90 percent noncondensing relative humidity.
3. Minimum efficiency of 85 percent, power factor greater than or equal to 0.90, compliance with reduction of hazardous substances (RoHS). Rated for operating temperature range of area in which driver is installed.
4. Limit inrush current to minimize breaker tripping.
a. Base specification: NEMA 410 standard for inrush current for electronic drivers. b. Preferred Specification: Meet or exceed 30 milliamp-squared-seconds at 277VAC for up to 50 watts of load and 75 amps at 240 microseconds at 277VAC for 100 watts of load.
5. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A.
6. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line voltage input.
7. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 10 percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements at full output. THD at no point in the dimming curve allows imbalance current to exceed full output THD.
8. Support automatic adaptation, allowing for future luminaire upgrades and enhancements and deliver improved performance:
a. Adjustment of forward LED voltage, supporting 3V through 55V. b. Adjustment of LED current from 150mA to 1.4A at the 100 percent control input point in increments of 1mA.
c. Adjustment for operating hours to maintain constant lumens (within 5 percent) over the 50,000 hour design life of the system, and deliver up to 20 percent energy savings early in the life cycle.
9. Operate for a (+/- 10 percent) supply voltage of 120V through 277VAC at 60Hz.
10. UL Recognized under the component program and modular for simple field replacement.
Drivers that are not UL Recognized or not suited for field replacement will not be considered.
11. Ability to provide no light output when the analog control signal drops below 0.3 V, or the DALI/DMX digital signal calls for light to be extinguished and consume 0.5 watts or less in this standby. Control dead band between 0.3V and 0.65V included to allow for voltage variation of incoming signal without causing noticeable variation in luminaire to luminaire output.
B. Light Quality:
1. Over the entire range of available drive currents, driver to provide step-free, continuous dimming to black from 100 percent to 0.1 percent and 0 percent relative light output, or 100 percent to 1 percent light output and step to 0 percent where indicated. Driver to respond similarly when raising from 0 percent to 100 percent. a. Driver must be capable of 20 bit dimming resolution for white light LED drivers or 15 bit resolution for RGBW LED drivers.
2. Driver must be capable of configuring a linear or logarithmic dimming curve, allowing fine grained resolution at low light levels.
3. Drivers to track evenly across multiple luminaires at all light levels, and must have an input signal to output light level that allows smooth adjustment over the entire dimming range.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 708
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-5
4. Driver and luminaire electronics to deliver illumination that is free from objectionable flicker as measured by flicker index (ANSI/IES RP-16-10). At all points within the dimming range from 100 percent to 0.1 percent luminaire will have:
a. LED dimming driver to provide continuous step-free, flicker free dimming similar to incandescent source.
b. Base specification: Based on IEEE PAR1789, minimum output frequency should be greater than 1250 Hz.
c. Preferred specification: Flicker index to be equal to incandescent, less than 1 percent at all frequencies below 1000 Hz.
C. Control Input:
1. Provide control protocol to match lighting control system specified for use with luminaire.
2. 4-Wire (0-10V DC Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers:
a. Meet IEC 60929 Annex E for General White Lighting LED drivers. b. Connect to devices compatible with 0 to 10V Analog Control Protocol, Class 2, capable of sinking 0.6 ma per driver at a low end of 0.3V. Limit the number of drivers on each 0-10V control output based on voltage drop and control capacity.
2.4 LAMPS
A. Provide lamps for luminaires.
B. Provide lamp catalogued for specified luminaire type.
C. LED (Light Emitting Diode):
1. LED manufacturer will include, but not be limited to, light source, luminaire, power supply and control interface with added components as needed for complete and functioning system.
a. Comply with ANSI chromaticity standard for classifications of color temperature.
See Luminaire Schedule for specified LED lamp color and color temperature. UL or ETL listed and labeled.
b. Luminaire testing per IESNA LM-79 and LM-80 procedures. c. Lamp life for white LEDs: 50,000 plus hours with lamp failure occurring when LED produces 70 percent of initial rated lumens.
d. Lamp life for color LEDs: 30,000 plus hours with lamp failure occurring when LED produces 50 percent of its initial rated lumens.
e. LED Drivers: Reverse polarity protection, open circuit protection, require no minimum load. Minimum 80 percent efficiency. Class A noise rating. f. Dimming: LED system capable of full and continuous dimming. g. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): See Luminaire Schedule for selection of color temperature for each luminaire. Ranges given below reflect maximum allowable tolerances for color temperature range for each nominal CCT. 1) Nominal CCT:
(a) 3500 K (3465 ± 245)
h. Color Rendering Index (CRI) to be greater than or equal to 80.
2. Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install per manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements.
B. Install luminaires securely, in neat and workmanlike manner.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 709
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-6
C. Install luminaires of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that luminaires comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
D. Wiring:
1. Recessed luminaires to be installed using flexible metallic conduit with luminaire conductors spliced to branch circuit conductors in nearby accessible junction box over ceiling. Junction box fastened to building structural member within 6-feet of luminaire.
2. Luminaires for lift out and removal from ceiling pattern without disconnecting conductors or defacing ceiling materials.
3. Install junction box, flexible conduit and high temperature insulated conductors for through wiring of recessed luminaires.
E. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at substantial completion.
F. Replace LED drivers deemed as excessively noisy by Architect, Engineer, or Owner.
G. Support luminaires larger than 2- by 4-foot size independent of ceiling framing.
H. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on architectural reflected ceiling plan.
I. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
J. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
K. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
L. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
M. Install wall mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Architectural Drawings.
N. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
O. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.
P. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Q. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
R. Where manufactured wiring assemblies are used, ensure that wiring assembly manufacturer sends components to appropriate luminaire manufacturer for respective installation of proper components.
S. Coordination:
1. Coordination of Conditions: Coordinate ceiling construction, recessing depth and other construction details prior to ordering luminaires for shipment. Refer cases of uncertain applicability to Architect for resolution prior to release of luminaires for shipment. Where luminaires supplied do not match ceiling construction, replace luminaires at no cost to Owner.
2. Electrical drawings are schematic, identifying quantity and type of luminaires used and their approximate location, but are not to be used for dimensional purposes. Reference architectural drawings for exact locations, including mounting heights.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 710
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-7
3. Provide lighting indicated on Drawings with luminaire of the type designated and appropriate for location.
4. Provide LED luminaires with driver compatible to lighting control system as shown in drawings and as specified.
T. Field Quality Control:
1. Perform field inspection in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements.
2. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.
U. Cleaning:
1. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
2. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
3. Clean paint splatters, dirt, dust, fingerprints, and debris from luminaires.
4. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
5. Clean finishes and touch up damaged finishes per by manufacturer's instructions.
V. Demonstrate luminaire operation for minimum of two hours.
3.2 LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements.
B. Align, mount and level luminaires uniformly. Use ball hangers for suspended stem mounted luminaires.
C. Avoid interference with and provide clearance from equipment. Where indicated locations for luminaires conflict with locations for equipment, change locations for luminaire by minimum distance necessary as directed by Architect.
D. Interior Luminaire Supports:
1. Support Luminaires: Anchor supports to structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling.
2. Maintain luminaire positions after cleaning and relamping.
3. Support luminaires without causing ceiling or partition to deflect.
4. Provide mounting supports for recessed and pendant mounted luminaires as required by CBC.
3.3 LED DRIVERS INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps per manufacturer's installation instructions and requirements.
B. Where driver is remote mounted, size wiring based on type of driver, driver distance from luminaire, and voltage/power level, and manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Protect 0-10V input from line voltage mis-connection, and so it will be immune and the output unresponsive to induced AC voltage on the control leads.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 711
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-1
SECTION 27 00 00
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1DESIGN-BUILD SUMMARY
A. Work included in 27 00 00 applies to Division 27, Communications work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to make communications systems ready for Owner's use for proposed project.
1.2 DESIGN-BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
A. This document is issued to give Bidders a basis for preparing a proposal to design and install a complete Communications system for this project.
B. Alternates to this Document may be offered as a separate proposal.
1.3 DESIGN-BUILD APPROACH
A. Use this Specification for design/engineering requirements, workmanship and materials or construction. Utilize design-build concept throughout construction phase of project.
B. Investigate and be apprised of applicable codes, rules, and regulations as enforced by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
C. Visit the Site of the proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine conditions that affect this work.
1.4 DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Contents of Section apply to Division 27 Specifications.
Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 27 Sections, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements take precedence.
B. Design Criteria: Reference Basis of Design narrative document.
C. Pathways for Communication Systems Criteria:
1. Refer to Section 27 05 28, Pathways for Communications Systems.
D. Communications Horizontal Cabling Criteria:
1. Refer to Section 27 15 00, Communications Horizontal Cabling.
1.5 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements applies to Division 27, Communications work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of communications systems for proposed project.
B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 712
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-2
C. Definitions:
1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.
3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished.
4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent," substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.
5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.
6. Entrance Facility (EF): Area or location that contains entrance point (demarcation) cable and associated equipment for telecommunication services entering the building.
7. Equipment Room (ER): Area or location that contains backbone cabling associated with interbuilding cable or cable that connects buildings together in a campus environment.
ERs may contain Main Cross-Connects, Intermediate Cross-Connects, Horizontal CrossConnects, and Telecommunication Rooms.
8. Main Cross-Connect (MC): Area or location that contains telecommunications equipment for connecting backbone cable to/from Intermediate Cross-Connects and Horizontal Cross-Connects. Active telecommunications equipment will often be contained in this area to serve as the telecommunications hub or headend. Backbone cable from Local Exchange Carrier's point of demarcation will connect to building backbone cable or active telecommunications equipment at this location.
9. Main Point of Entry (MPOE): Area or location where service providers terminate and handoff to customer owned premise cabling system.
10. Main Telecommunications Room (MTR): Location that services as the main distribution point for Client/Owner telecommunications system. The MTR connects to each TR and the MPOE. MTR should not be accessible by the service providers. In most cases the MTR is a private space.
11. Intermediate Cross-Connect (IC): Area or location that contains telecommunications equipment for connecting backbone cable from the MC to backbone cable distributing to one or many Horizontal Cross-Connects. This location may contain active telecommunications equipment.
12. Horizontal Cross-Connect (HC): Area or location that contains telecommunications equipment, cable terminations and cross-connect wiring. HC is the recognized connection point between backbone and horizontal pathway facilities.
13. Telecommunications Room (TR): Area or location containing telecommunications equipment, cable terminations and cross-connect wiring. Three applications serviced by TRs are horizontal cable connections, backbone system interconnection and entrance facilities. The TR provides facilities (space, power, grounding, etc.) for housing telecommunications equipment. TR may contain a MC, IC or HC and a demarcation point or an interbuilding entrance facility.
14. Interbuilding Cable: Backbone cable associated with connecting buildings together in a multibuilding or campus environment.
15. Intrabuilding Cable: Backbone cable associated with connecting Entrance Facility, Equipment Rooms, Main Cross-Connects, Intermediate Cross-Connects, Horizontal Cross-Connects, and Telecommunication Rooms together on single floor or multi-floor building.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 713
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-3
1.6 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section applies to Division 27, Communications Contract Documents.
B. Related Work:
1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. 27 05 28 - Pathways for Communications Systems
c. 27 05 28.28 - Firestopping for Communications Systems d. 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling
e. Drawings
f. Addenda
g. Owner/Architect Agreement
h. Owner/Contractor Agreement
i. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits
C. Related Products/Systems within Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security.
1. Section 28 10 00 – Access Control and Intrusion Detection
1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 27, Communications Sections and those listed in this Section.
B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:
1. State of California:
a. CBC - California Building Code
b. CEC - California Electrical Code
c. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
d. CFC - California Fire Code
e. CMC - California Mechanical Code
f. CPC - California Plumbing Code
g. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference codes, standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:
1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act
2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act
3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
a. ANSI/TIA-526-7-A Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant
b. ANSI/TIA-526-14-C Optical Power Loss of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant c. ANSI/TIA-568.0-D - Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises d. ANSI/TIA-568.1-D - Commercial Building Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
e. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard
f. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D-2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard, Addendum 2
g. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
h. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D-1 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 714
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-4
i. ANSI/TIA-568.4-D - Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components j. ANSI/TIA-569-E - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
k. ANSI/TIA-570-D - Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard l. ANSI/TIA-598-D - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
m. ANSI/TIA-598-D-1 - Optical Fiber Color Coding in Cable Addendum 1, additional Colors for Elements 3-16
n. ANSI/TIA-598-D-2 - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding Addendum 2, Jacket Color for OM5 Indoor Fiber Cables
o. ANSI/TIA-606-C - Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure
p. ANSI/TIA-J-STD-607-D - Generic Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
q. TIA-758-B Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
r. ANSI/TIA-942-B - Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers
4. APWA - American Public Works Association
5. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers
6. ASHRAE - Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process
7. ASIS INTL - American Society for Industrial Security International
8. ASTM - ASTM International
9. AVIXA - Producer of InfoComm and international trade organization representing the audiovisual industry
10. BICSI - Building Industry Consulting Service International a. BICSI TDMM - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 14th Edition, 2020
b. BICSI ITSIMM - Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual, 8th Edition, 2022
c. BICSI OSPDRM - Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, 2018
11. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations
12. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency
13. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
14. FCC - Federal Communications Division
15. IBC - International Building Code
16. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
17. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
18. IFC - International Fire Code
19. ISO - International Organization for Standardization
20. NEC - National Electric Code
21. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
22. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
23. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association
24. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures.
B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.
C. In addition:
1. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 715
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-5
confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.
2. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section. Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions.
3. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 27, Communications Sections.
4. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications and Drawings. a. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.
Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.
b. Provide a red rectangle around part number and description with corresponding red arrow pointing to the item/material being submitted. 1) Submit one submittal per specification section in Division 27. As stated above, identify all items being submitted for approval prior to installation. c. Include technical data, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided.
Reference individual Division 27, Communications specification Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements. d. See Division 27, Communications individual Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.
5. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; Bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review.
6. Resubmission Requirements: Make corrections or changes in submittals as required, and in consideration of Engineer’s comments. Identify Engineer’s comments and provide an individual response to each of the Engineer’s comments. Cloud changes in the submittals and further identify changes which are in response to Engineer’s comments.
7. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support to meet the AHJ terms of satisfaction. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components.
8. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 27, Communications Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical submittals.
9. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.
10. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:
a. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional. b. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 716
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-6
equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.
11. Shop Drawings:
a. Provide coordinated Shop Drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 27, Communications specification Sections for additional requirements for Shop Drawings outside of these requirements.
b. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.
c. Provide Shop Drawings indicating all elevations for proposed layouts of equipment on all walls and for each rack elevation. This is required to obtain approval prior to installations. No work will be accepted prior to the approval process. Contractor is to submit for all wall elevations and rack elevations per these specifications and as illustrated on the drawings. If a conflict exists, contractor shall bring it to the attention of the Owner and work to a satisfactory solution that meets the terms of satisfaction.
1) Contents shall include all walls, racks where Contractor proposes to install submittal material and equipment.
12. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.
13. Resubmission Requirements:
a. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide submittals as specified. The Engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Changes made for the resubmittal will be indicated in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and will reference response to comment. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Cloud changes in the submittals.
b. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exception taken, or "make corrections as noted."
c. When submitting Drawings for Engineer's re-review, clearly indicate changes on Drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.
14. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:
a. Submit, at one time, electronic files (native/searchable PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
1) Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
2) Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities, relevant to each piece of equipment: batteries, lamp lenses, speakers and filters.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 717
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-7
3) Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Sections. 4) Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. 5) Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and subassemblies.
6) Include copy of burn-in and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. 7) Include copy of software/appliance programming.
8) Include commissioning reports.
9) Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
b. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Submit copy of material used for Owner instruction. Field instruction per Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements Article titled "Demonstration."
c. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.
15. Record Drawings:
a. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “as-constructed” conditions. Indicate on Drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of conduit, and location of concealed communication items. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.
b. Record Drawings are to include equipment and connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project. c. At completion of project, input changes to original project on Revit Model and make one set of black-line Drawings created from Revit Model in version/release equal to Contract Drawings. Submit Revit Model and Drawings upon substantial completion.
d. Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for incoming utilities and site raceways below grade extending to 5-feet outside building line. e. See Division 27, Communications individual Sections for additional items to include in Record Drawings.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.
B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement, or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.
C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., conduit) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 718
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-8
Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.
E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.
F. Provide products that are UL listed.
G. Contractor Qualifications:
1. Minimum of five years' experience in the design, installation, testing and maintenance of communications systems.
2. Must employ at least one full time BICSI certified Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) who is involved in reviewing work performed by contractor on this project.
3. Installation technicians must be BICSI certified for copper and fiber optic installations that are current and in good standing with BICSI. Provide roster of communications technicians and verifiable certifications for this project.
4. Maintain a local service facility which stocks spare devices and/or components for servicing systems.
5. Be able to provide project references for three projects, including scope of Work, project type, Owner/user contact name and telephone number.
6. The contractor selected for this project must be certified by the manufacturer of the approved products and utilize these components for completion of work.
7. Provide Manufacturer certifications for each respective technician that will be working on the project. All technicians must be manufacturer certified to install, terminate, and test horizontal and backbone cabling.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.
B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.
Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.
1.11 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout Drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet.
Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, fire protection, electrical, ceiling suspension, and ceiling tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 719
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-9
B. Prepare Drawings as follows:
1. Drawings in Revit model. Revit model release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size, and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.
2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.
3. Incorporate addenda items and change orders.
4. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.
C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.
D. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto.
E. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer, including but not limited to cable, outlets, patch panels, equipment connection cords and wall plates.
2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.
B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.
C. Hazardous Materials:
1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.
2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.
3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.
B. Install equipment requiring access (i.e., amplifiers, taps, zone controllers, volume controls, and storage devices) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 720
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-10
with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.
C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.
Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines.
D. Earthwork:
1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork divisions.
Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling.
b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.
E. Firestopping:
1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
a. Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
F. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy.
3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, and individual Division 27 Communications Sections.
B. General:
1. Earthquake resistant designs for Communications (Division 27) equipment and distribution, i.e. cabinets and racks, ceiling assemblies, raceways, ladder racking, etc. to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.
2. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.
3. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for cabinets, racks, major equipment and overhead raceways. Engineer to design and provide stamped Shop Drawings cabinets, racks, October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 721
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-11
major equipment and overhead raceway. Submit Shop Drawings along with equipment submittals.
4. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic flexible joints for piping and crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit Shop Drawings along with seismic bracing details.
5. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of communications equipment during earthquake.
3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.
B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:
1. Underground conduit installation prior to backfilling.
2. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.
3. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.
C. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
1. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, or addition of a structure to existing structure, while existing structure is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed.
2. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every item is thoroughly prepared.
Install new wiring to point of connection.
3. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference to a minimum. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work.
4. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching Requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).
2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftspeople of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 722
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-12
3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.
Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.
4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.
5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.6 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.
3.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.
2. Protect all equipment and conduit to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.
B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required.
Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 723
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-13
B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.
3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.
B. Install equipment and devices in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly secured to mounting surfaces. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test operation and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning equipment.
D. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment.
3.11 PAINTING
A. Confirm Painting requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.
In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of communications work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces in telecommunications rooms, i.e., hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.
2. In a telecommunications room, on roof or other exposed areas, equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect. Fire rated plywood backboards to receive two coats of fire retardant paint on all six sides; color to be white.
3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.
4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.
5. Conduit: Clean, primer coat and paint interior conduit exposed in finished areas with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces. Color selected by Architect.
6. Covers: Covers such as handholes, maintenance holes, vaults, pullboxes and the like will be furnished with finishes which resist corrosion and rust. Covers are to be identified with ‘Communications.’ It is the Contractor's responsibility to proactively seek and obtain approval with Owner prior to purchasing and prior to installation for terms of satisfaction.
3.12 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
1. Scope:
a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to communications systems required to meet code and accommodate installation of new work.
b. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 724
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-14
c. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work. Compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.
2. Equipment: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, fixtures, or fittings being removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other items not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner.
3. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused raceways behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap raceways and patch surfaces to match surrounding finish.
4. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment, electrical boxes, fittings and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings).
5. Examination:
a. Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. b. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. c. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
1) Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish work.
2) Verify location and number of communications outlets, racks, panels, etc. in field.
d. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
6. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.
7. Execution:
a. Remove existing connectors, backboxes, wall plates and other communications equipment and devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless shown as retained or relocated on Drawings.
b. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain communications continuity of existing systems during construction. Remove or relocate communications boxes, conduit, wiring, equipment, and the like, as encountered in removed or remodeled areas in existing construction affected by this work. In no event shall existing systems that are to remain operational, be diminished in any capacity by the demolition efforts.
c. Remove and restore cable which serves usable existing outlets clear of construction or demolition.
d. If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed through boxes for other existing communications equipment which is being retained, provide new conduit and cable to bypass abandoned outlets. e. If existing conduits pass through partitions or ceiling which are being removed or remodeled, provide new conduit and cable to reroute clear of construction or demolition and maintain service to existing equipment. If these are conduits which require a new cable home run, e.g. telecom cable, request clarification from Architect or Engineer prior to proceeding with demolition. f. Extend cable slack and devices in existing walls to be furred out. g. Remove abandoned cable to point of origin and telecommunications room or any other room or space.
h. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 725
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-15
i. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.
j. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. k. Maintain access to existing communications installations which remain active.
Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. l. Existing communications outlets and devices are indicated on technology demolition plans. Verify exact location and number of existing communications outlets and devices in field. Only partial existing communications shown. Locations of items shown on Drawings as existing are partially based on Record and other Drawings which may contain errors. Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish intent of Contract Documents.
m. Remove abandoned cable to leave site clean.
B. Existing Communication Systems: Maintain existing systems in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections.
1. Notify Owner at least five working days before partially or completely disabling system.
2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.13 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:
a. Testing Reports, as outlined in their respective Division sections b. Cleaning
c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
d. Training of Operating Personnel
e. Record Drawings, including cabling identifications, symbols, and locations f. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates, including extended manufacturer's warranties g. Start-up/test Documents and Commissioning Reports
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.
B. Tests:
1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. All cabling test results are to be included.
2. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide appropriate personnel with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.
3.15 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement that Communications items were installed in accordance with manufacturer's October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 726
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-16
recommendations, and UL listings and approvals. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 727
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28.28-1
SECTION 27 05 28.28
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Firestop Sealants
2. Firestop Putty
3. Fire Rated Cable Pathways
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 27, Communications and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. In addition, reference the following:
1. Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, provide:
1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog data for specified products demonstrating compliance with referenced standards and listing numbers of systems in which each product is to be used.
2. Schedule of UL System Drawings: Submit schedule of expected opening locations and sizes, penetrating items and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance ratings. If engineering recommendations are necessary, list these in the schedule too.
3. UL System Drawings: Furnish copies of UL Systems identified in schedule above. Include any engineering recommendations.
4. Certificates: Product Certificate of Compliance from the firestop system manufacturer certifying material compliance with applicable code and specified performance characteristics.
5. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Products/Systems: Provide firestopping systems that comply with the following requirements:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 728
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28.28-2
a. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified, testing and inspection agency. A qualified testing and inspection agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop system acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Firestopping products bear the classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.
2. Installer Qualifications: Experience in performing work of this Section who is qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install firestop products in accordance with specified requirements.
3. General: Use only firestopping products that have been tested for specific fire resistance rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved for each separate instance.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire rated cable pathway devices to be used for ALL low-voltage, video, data and voice cabling, optical fiber raceways and certain high voltage cabling where frequent cable moves, adds and changes may occur. Pathways required for high voltage cabling will be detailed on the Drawings. Such devices will:
1. Meet the hourly fire rating of fire rated wall and or floor penetrated.
2. Be tested for the surrounding construction and cable types involved.
3. Have UL Systems permitting cable loads from “Zero to 100 percent Visual Fill.” This requirement eliminates need for fill-ratio calculations to be made by cable technicians to ensure cable load is within maximum allowed by UL System.
4. Not have inner fabric liner that tightens around and compresses cables tightly together encouraging alien cross-talk interference.
5. Be “Zero-Maintenance” defined as: No action required by cabling technician to open and/or close pathway for cable moves, adds, or changes, such as:
a. Opening or closing of doors.
b. Spinning rings to open or close fabric liner.
c. Removal and/or replacement of any material such as firestop caulk, putty, pillows, bag foam muffins, foam blocks, or foam closures of any sort. d. Furnish letter from manufacturer certifying compliance with this definition of ZeroMaintenance. 1) Pathways will be engineered such that two or more devices may be ganged together for larger cable capacities.
2) Pathways will be engineered to be re-enterable so they can be retrofitted and removed from around existing cables without cutting and resplicing them.
3) Affix adhesive wall label immediately adjacent to devices to communicate to future cable technicians, authorities having jurisdiction and others the manufacturer of the device and the corresponding UL System number installed.
e. Where nonmechanical pathways must be utilized, such as sealing (caulking) around single or grouped conduits, provide products that upon curing do not reemulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown, or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water, or other forms of moisture characteristic during or after construction. Provide letter from manufacturer certifying compliance with this Section.
f. Cable pathway to replace conduit sleeves in walls and floors and; October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 729
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28.28-3
1) When installed individually in floors, devices to pass through core-drilled opening utilizing tested floor plates.
2) When multiple units are ganged in floors, devices to be anchored by means of a tested grid.
3) When installed individually in walls, devices to pass through core-drilled opening utilizing tested wall plates.
4) When multiple units are ganged in walls, devices to be anchored by means of a tested grid.
g. Cable tray will terminate at each fire barrier and resume on the other side such that cables pass independently through devices. Cable tray will be properly supported on each side of fire barrier.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install firestopping products when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limitations recommended by manufacturer.
B. Do not install firestopping products when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
C. Maintain minimum temperature before, during and for a minimum 3 days after installation of materials.
D. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
E. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
F. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.
G. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Firestop Sealants:
1. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies Inc. (STI).
2. Or approved equivalent.
B. Firestop Putty:
1. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies Inc. (STI).
2. Or approved equivalent.
C. Fire Rated Cable Pathways:
1. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies Inc. (STI).
2. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 FIRESTOP SEALANTS
A. STI SpecSeal® Brand single component latex formulations that upon cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture, the following products are acceptable:
1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) SpecSeal® Series SSS Sealant.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 730
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28.28-4
2. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) SpecSeal® Series LCI Sealant.
B. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration and construction condition indicated only from a single manufacturer.
C. Basis of Design: Firestop components shown on Drawings and listed in this specification Section are designed based on Specified Technologies, Inc. product line. Manufacturer listed is allowed on condition of meeting the specified conditions including the available space for the equipment (including code-required working clearances). Remove and replace components installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner.
2.3 FIRESTOP PUTTY
A. STI SpecSeal® Brand intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds, the following products are acceptable:
1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) SpecSeal® Series SSP Putty.
B. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration and construction condition indicated only from a single manufacturer.
C. Basis of Design: Firestop components shown on Drawings and listed in this specification Section are designed based on Specified Technologies, Inc. product line. Manufacturer listed is allowed on condition of meeting the specified conditions including the available space for the equipment (including code-required working clearances). Remove and replace components installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner.
2.4 FIRE RATED CABLE PATHWAYS
A. STI EZ-PATH™ Brand device modules comprised of steel raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0 to 100 percent cable fill, the following products are acceptable:
1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) EZ-PATH™ Fire Rated Pathway.
B. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration and construction condition indicated only from a single manufacturer.
C. Basis of Design: Firestop components shown on Drawings and listed in this specification Section are designed based on Specified Technologies, Inc. product line. Manufacturer listed is allowed on condition of meeting the specified conditions including the available space for the equipment (including code-required working clearances). Remove and replace components installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner.
1. Manufacturer: STI
a. Part Numbers: TRK444, INCLUDING ALL FRAMES, BLANKS, DEVICES,
GASKETS, FIRE SEALING MATERIALS, AND FIRE WRAP TO ACHIEVE THE DESIRED T-RATING.
D. 4-inch EZ-PATHWAYS:
1. Manufacturer: STI
a. Part Numbers:
1) EZD44S2, 4-inch Device
2) EZDP44S2, 4-inch Device with wall plates and labels
3) EZP544W, Multi-gang wall plate brackets, 1-5 DEVICES 4) EZG444, Single slot frame for Four pathways
5) EZDG444S2, Single bank floor grid- Four devices with floor frame
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 731
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-1
SECTION 27 05 28
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Conduit Pathways
a. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings
b. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings
c. PVC Conduit
2. Conduit Accessories
3. Penetration Sealing Systems
4. Telecommunications Outlet Boxes
5. Pull Boxes
6. J-Hooks
7. Ceiling Hatches
B. This Section specifies the requirements to provide communications conduit pathways, boxes, cable trays, innerduct and fittings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 27, Communications and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. Related Work:
1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
2. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements
3. 27 00 00 - Communications Basic Requirements
4. Drawings
5. Addenda
6. Owner/Architect Agreement
7. Owner/Contractor Agreement
8. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. Provide plan drawings showing completions and as-built corrections which indicate type, size, placement, routing and/or length for pathway components; e.g., conduit, boxes, enclosures, etc.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 732
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. Cabinet: A freestanding floor-mounted modular enclosure designed to house and protect rackmounted electronic equipment.
B. Conduit: Round raceway.
C. Conduit Body: Separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that provides access through removable cover(s) to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system or at a terminal point of the system.
D. Pull Box Enclosure: Box with a cover installed in one or more runs of raceway to facilitate pulling conductors through the raceway system. There are no openings in the cover.
E. Pathway: Physical infrastructure (e.g., conduit, cable tray, raceway) used to facilitate the placement of information and communications technology (ICT), audiovisual (AV) or electronic safety and security (ESS) cabling media.
F. Raceway: Enclosed channel designed expressly for holding wires or cables. Metal, plastic or insulating material and the term includes conduit, tubing, wireways, underfloor pathways and surface raceways; does not include basket tray, nor cable runway.
G. Surface Raceway: Surface-mounted metal channel or plastic duct with snap-in removable covers for housing and protecting electrical wires and cables. Raceway and fittings are designed so sections can be electrically and mechanically coupled together without subjecting cables to abrasion.
H. Basket Tray (Wire Basket) Systems: Includes but are not limited to straight sections of type wire basket runway cable trays, bends, tees, elbows, drop-outs, supports and accessories.
I. Vaults or Maintenance Holes: Precast vaults or Maintenance Holes (MH) are located in various areas including landscape, hardscape, pedestrian sidewalks, incidental traffic, and full traffic instances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Conduit Pathways
1. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings:
a. Sealing Fittings:
1) Crouse-Hinds
2) Or approved equivalent.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 733
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-3
b. Wheatland Tube
c. Appleton
d. Or approved equivalent.
3. PVC Conduit
a. Contractor chosen manufacturer shall be submitted for approval.
B. Conduit Accessories:
1. Pull String: Polyolefin pull line, tensile strength of 200-lbs. a. Gardner Bender
b. Greenlee
c. Ideal
d. Klein Tools
e. Or approved equivalent.
2. Pull Tape: Woven 3/4-Inch polyester pull tape, 2,500-lb tensile strength, pre-lubrication to reduce coefficient of friction, imprinted with footage markings. a. Gardner Bender
b. George-Ingraham
c. Greenlee
d. Ideal
e. Klein Tools
f. Mule Tape
g. Or approved equivalent.
C. Penetration Sealing Systems:
1. STI
2. Or approved equivalent
D. Telecommunications Outlet Boxes:
1. RandL
2. Raco
3. Or approved equivalent.
E. Pull Boxes:
1. Hoffman
2. Or approved equivalent.
F. J-Hooks, Plenum Rated clip on cradles:
1. Two-inch
a. B-Line
b. Erico
c. Panduit
d. CEAS
1) Stiffy
e. Or approved equivalent.
2. Four-inch
a. B-Line
b. Erico
c. Panduit
d. CEAS
1) Stiffy
e. Or approved equivalent
G. Ceiling Hatches
1. Provided by ceiling hatch contractor.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 734
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-4
2. A minimum size of 24-inch by 24-inch hinged ceiling hatch shall be provided and installed where necessary to efficiently access the cabling in accessible areas. a. Coordinate placement of ceiling hatches, as required to complete the scope of work associated with this project, with the Owner, Architect, General Contractor, and Technology Design Consultant prior to installation.
3. A rated ceiling hatch shall be required if located in a rated envelope, corridor or shaft. a. Hatch rating shall match or exceed environment.
b. Shall be paint grade.
c. Coordinate final finishes with Architect and Owner.
2.2 CONDUIT PATHWAYS
A. Pathways: Labeled and/or listed as acceptable to the AHJ as suitable for the use intended.
B. Table 1: Product Identification:
Product Designation Product Type
RMC Rigid Metal Conduit
PVC-coated RMC PVC Externally Coated RMC
EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing
PVC Polyvinylchloride Conduit
LFMC Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit
LFNC Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetal Conduit
C. The product identification codes used for the Communications Raceways and Boxes in Part 2, Products, are summarized in Table 1.
D. Bitumastic material or plastic tape.
2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit:
1. Type RMC: Rigid Metal Conduit.
2. Type PVC-coated RMC: PVC externally coated conduit; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating and internal galvanized surface.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: In-line straight-through, threaded, galvanized steel fittings and Type C conduit bodies only; do not use bends or tees, e.g., Lbs.
1. Bonding and Grounding Locknuts and Wedges: Malleable iron with set screws and lug screws.
2. Insulated Bushing: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C.
3. Bonding and Grounding Bushing: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C, with solderless lugs or lug screws.
4. Sealing Fittings: Threaded type conduit seal fittings and sealing compound suitable for hazardous location installations in accordance with CEC:
a. Crouse-Hind retrofit sealing fitting EYSR.
b. Crouse-Hind CHICO A sealing compound.
C. All conduits must be proofed using a mandrel.
2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. Type EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 735
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-5
1. In-line straight-through steel or malleable iron fittings and Type C conduit bodies only; do not use bends or tees, e.g. LBs.
2. Wet Areas: Steel compression-type couplings and nipples.
3. Dry Areas: Set screw-type couplings and nipples.
4. Bonding Locknuts:
a. Malleable iron with set screws and lug screws.
b. Insulated Bushing: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150C. c. Bonding and Grounding Bushing: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150C, with solderless lugs or lug screws.
C. All conduits must be proofed by using a mandrel.
D. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit
1. Schedule 40
a. PVC Schedule 40 type conduit fittings shall be the same manufacturer as conduit.
All plastic conduit and fittings shall have solvent-weld connections and shall provide a watertight joint.
b. Straight sections of single bore PVC Schedule 40 conduit can be manually bent to form curves with a radius 40 feet or greater.
c. All field formed long radius bends must be able to pass a 12-inches long by 3 5/8- inch wide solid ‘slug’ or ‘mouse’ mandrel.
2.5 CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
A. Pull String: Measuring and pulling string constructed of synthetic fiber with plastic jacket.
B. Pull Tape: Measuring and pulling tape constructed of synthetic fiber with plastic jacket, printed with accurate sequential footage marks.
1. George-Ingraham 1/2-inch tape 9216-JK.
2. Mule Tape.
2.6 PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS
A. Firestopping: Provide fire barrier penetration sealing materials as specified in Division 07, Firestopping Section.
B. Approved horizontal penetration pathway system.
1. STI EZ-PATH
a. Default and standard is 4-inch pathways; part numbers will change if not 4-inch as specified with the following:
1) Part Number:
(a) EZDP44S2, Series 44+ with wall mounting kits. Single device shall have wall plate mounting kit included:
(1) EZEZP144W.
(b) All Pathway devices require:
(1) EZRCM44s radius control modules.
(c) Extension Modules:
(1) EZD44ES, 6-inch extension module.
2) Bond to grounding system.
b. Ganged multiple pathways provide the following ganged mounting brackets for the number of devices required:
1) 1-5 pathways:
(a) EZP544W.
2) 6 pathways:
(a) EZP644W.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 736
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-6
3) Up to 10 pathways:
(a) EZP544WD.
4) Up to 12 pathways:
(a) EZP644WD.
2.7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: Minimum 5-inch square by 2-7/8-inch deep, galvanized steel for use with single- and double-gang plaster rings, based on conditions. Typical outlets require singlegang plaster rings.
B. Five Square Outlet Boxes: Minimum 5-inch square by 2-7/8-inch deep with built-in cable management for use with single- and double-gang plaster rings, based on conditions. Typical outlets require single-gang plaster rings.
1. Approved manufacturer and part number:
a. Randl P/N T-55017.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: Minimum 5-inch square by 2-7/8-inch-deep. Provide gasketed, watertight single- or double-gang cover, based on conditions.
D. Floor Boxes for Installation in Cast-In-Place Concrete Floors: Flush mounted and fully adjustable formed steel as shown on the Drawings. Floor boxes provided by Division 26, Electrical.
E. Plaster Rings: Single- or Double-gang.
F. Poke-Through Floor Boxes
2.8 PULL BOXES
A. Construction: NEMA Standard No. 250. Type 1 galvanized steel enclosures designed for use as junction boxes and pull boxes with flat screw-applied covers, with or without knockouts and gray enamel finish. See Division 27 section related to proper pull box sizing.
2.9 J-HOOKS
A. Constructed of galvanized steel, stainless steel, hot dipped zinc, plenum rated materials.
B. Wires, all-thread, pencil-rod, metal bracket supports mounted to structure.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 737
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-1
SECTION 27 15 00
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Station Cabling
2. Insert Outlets
3. Face Plates
4. Patch Panels
5. Patch Cords
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 27, Communications and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. Use this Section in conjunction with other Division 27, Communications specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total general requirements for the project communications systems and equipment.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. Meet requirements of NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.
C. ANSI/TIA-568 series, most recent revisions, addenda and systems bulletins. All applicable.
D. ANSI/TIA–569 Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, most recent revision including all relevant addenda and systems bulletins.
E. ANSI/TIA–862 Structured Cabling Infrastructure Standard for Intelligent Building Systems, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.
F. ANSI/TIA–942 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.
G. ANSI/TIA–1179 Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.
H. ANSI/TIA–4966 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Educational Facilities, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.
I. TIA–TSB–162 Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access Points, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 738
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-2
B. In addition, provide:
1. Shop Drawings - RCDD Stamped
a. Contractor will provide as-built electronic files in CAD format, containing the contract document drawing files, for use in the preparing of the shop drawings, by the contractor’s project dedicated RCDD.
b. Submit Overall Floor Plans: floor and site plans showing the locations of devices and cable routing, cabling pathways and vaults, with cable types and quantity called out.
c. Submit Shop drawings for the entire structured cabling system and grounding and bonding system, identifying such items as PBB, SBB, TBB, rack elevations, cabling pathways and pathway infrastructure, cable runway and other pathways. d. Shop Drawings that include, but are not limited to, the following:
Telecommunication Room layout, Telecommunication Room wall elevations, equipment rack elevations, cable routing, cable connecting diagrams, termination pin outs, supporting hardware details, block diagrams, riser diagrams, all primary and secondary cable pathways. Work may not begin until shop drawings are approved. Note: Intent of submitting shop drawings is for contractors to display a conceptual understanding of the issued Engineer drawings. Do not submit engineer's drawing on your title block.
2. Product Information
a. Catalog cut sheets and information directly related to each individual item being submitted. Identification of items must contain the physical and dimensional information, performance data, electrical characteristics, materials used in fabrication, and material finish. Clearly indicate on each sheet what is being submitted on with red rectangles and red arrows.
3. Wiring Diagrams
4. Rack Elevation Drawings
5. Qualifications
a. Submit Contractor current and valid RCDD credential holder on staff; must be Full Time Employee (FTE).
6. Contractor Technicians assigned to the project along with SCS manufacturer certifications. Must be current and in good standing.
a. Manufacturer:
1) CommScope
2) Leviton
3) Panduit
4) Or approved equivalent
7. Contractor Technicians assigned to the project and their BICSI installer credentials.
Current and in good standing.
8. Procedures for cable labeling and identification, long term documentation methods and numbering scheme in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606C.
9. Installation contractor shall have certified BICSI certifications for installers as well as RCDDs (Registered Communications Distribution Designer) and warranty certificates for products proposed. The installation contractor must be able to provide the cabling manufacturer’s structured cabling warranty for which is being proposed, at the time of bidding and installation of which extends and continues with the backbone specification. a. Certifications:
1) BICSI:
(a) RCDD
(b) Installer 2, Copper (INTSC)
(c) Installer 2, Optical Fiber (INSTF)
(d) Technician (TECH)
2) Manufacturer:
(a) CommScope - Systimax
(b) Leviton
(c) Panduit:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 739
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-3
(1) Technicians installing any Copper Distribution Systems shall have a current Panduit Certified Copper Technicians certificate. (2) Technicians installing any Fiber Distribution Systems shall have a current Panduit Certified Fiber Technicians certificate. (d) Or approved equivalent.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. Manufacturers to have a recognized certified installer program in place for system components proposed. Cable will be approved with manufacturer system installed.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. Structured Cabling System (SCS) warranty and conditions for a period of no less than the following per manufacturer:
1. CommScope: 25 Years
a. Contractor shall be in good standing with CommScope to offer the extended warranty. Validation is required at time of submittals. b. Extended Product Warranty. CommScope warrants, for a period of twenty-five (25) years from the Certification Date (the “Warranty Period”), that Products in the Registered System shall be free from defects in materials or workmanship subject, to the terms and conditions below and the terms, conditions and limitations of CommScope’s Limited Product Warranty in effect at the date of sale (available at http://www.commscope.com/Resources/Warranties/).
c. Application Warranty. During the Warranty Period, the Registered System will meet or exceed the specifications set forth in the System Specification and support Applications as documented therein.
d. System Warranty Requirements. The System Warranty applies only to Products that are:
1) Installed by an Authorized Partner, at the location listed on the System Warranty Certificate;
2) Installed in compliance with CommScope’s written design, engineering and installation procedures, and the specifications for the Application and the System Specification;
3) Designed, installed, and maintained in compliance with the applicable industry standards as set forth in the System Specification; 4) Not subject to conditions that exceed the individual Product Specification(s); 5) Used at the original site of installation;
6) Tested pursuant to industry standards and applicable CommScope testing requirements and satisfactorily pass such tests; and
7) Not otherwise expressly excluded or invalidated under the System Warranty Terms and Conditions. To qualify for a System Warranty, all documents, including the prescribed System test results, must be submitted to CommScope for review within sixty (60) days of installation, and registration for the System Warranty must be applied for with CommScope within ninety (90) days from the date the installation is complete. CommScope, in its sole judgment, shall determine if the System Warranty Requirements have been met. CommScope’s approval of a System Warranty shall be evidenced by a numbered registration System Warranty Certificate issued by CommScope.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 740
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-4
In the event a System Warranty Certificate is issued and CommScope subsequently discovers that any of the System Warranty requirements were not met, then the System Warranty shall be void. Beneficiary and Warranty Transfer. CommScope will only honor System Warranty claims made by the person or entity to which the System Warranty Certificate is issued. The System Warranty may, upon prior written approval from CommScope, be transferred to a successor in interest to the site where the Registered System was originally installed.
e. Modifications: Moves, repairs, alterations, additions, or changes to the Registered System (“Change(s)”) are only covered by the System Warranty if:
1) Performed by an Authorized Partner;
2) Installed in compliance with CommScope’s written design, engineering and installation procedures, and the specifications for the Application and the System Specification, and
3) Designed, installed, and maintained in compliance with the applicable industry standards as set forth in the System Specification. Day-to-day administration and maintenance of the Registered System by the EndCustomer will not void the System Warranty if performed in compliance with applicable CommScope system design and installation guidelines using CommScope approved products. All test results shall be sent for approval to CommScope along with a detailed description of the Change(s) and bill of materials within thirty (30) days of installation. If the Change(s) are approved, CommScope shall update the System Warranty registration to indicate the Change(s). Failure to comply with the foregoing relating to Change(s) shall void the System Warranty.
f. Exclusions from Warranty and Limitations on Liability. The "Exclusions from Warranty” and “Limitations on Liability” in the Limited Product Warranty shall apply to the System Warranty. The occurrence of an Exclusion from Warranty in the Limited Product Warranty shall void the System Warranty. The System Warranty shall also be void if any Product in the Registered System has been:
1) Removed from the original site of installation,
2) Altered, repaired or disassembled by a non-Authorized Partner, or 3) Exposed to, or has outside materials applied to it, including but not limited to paint, water, chemicals, solutions, cleaning supplies and lubricants (“Contamination”). End-Customer must notify an Authorized Partner or CommScope within 24 hours of any Contamination. Terms and Conditions CommScope Network Infrastructure System 25 Year Extended Product and Application Warranty (“System Warranty”) 3 Outside Plant Cable is excluded from and will void the System Warranty when installed above ground and exposed to the outside environment, including but not limited to, an aerial installation. Outside Plant Cable installed underground, either by direct burial or in conduit, is not excluded from the System Warranty. g. Failure of the End-Customer to submit any System Warranty claim to the authorized CommScope office as designated by CommScope within thirty (30) days following expiration of the System Warranty shall be an admission by the End-Customer and conclusive proof that the Registered System and Product(s) are in every respect as warranted and shall release CommScope and the Authorized Partner from any and all claims for damage or loss sustained by the End-Customer.
h. Any violation or non-compliance with the System Warranty Terms and Conditions will void the System Warranty.
i. Remedies:
1) If during the Warranty Period, the End-Customer experiences problems with a Registered System or a Product in a Registered System (“Problem”) and suspects there is a potential warranty claim hereunder, the End-Customer must first reasonably investigate potential causes of the suspected Problem October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 741
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-5
that are not CommScope related and reasonably determine that none of these potential causes were responsible for the Problem. Once the End Customer reasonably believes that all non-CommScope causes for the Problem are ruled out, but in no event more than thirty (30) days after the End-Customer knew or should have known of the Problem, the EndCustomer must contact the Authorized Partner that installed the Registered System to report the Problem. If the Authorized Partner is unable to resolve the Problem, then the Authorized Partner will contact CommScope and make a claim under the System Warranty for further investigation and resolution. If CommScope determines that a Problem is due to a breach of the System Warranty, CommScope will repair or replace Product as CommScope deems necessary to correct the Problem, including the provision of reasonable labor and removal and reinstallation of such Product at CommScope’s discretion. CommScope shall only be responsible for costs that have received the prior written authorization of CommScope. If CommScope chooses to repair Product, CommScope may use new or reconditioned replacement parts. If CommScope chooses to replace Product, CommScope may replace with new or reconditioned products of the same or similar design. Any repair or replacement will be warranted for either
(a) 90 days or
(b) The remainder of the original Warranty Period, whichever is longer. If the Problem is found by CommScope or an Authorized Partner not to be related to a Product or any warranty exclusions, then EndCustomer will be responsible for any costs incurred related to the Problem claim.
j. Choice of Law
1) The System Warranty shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of North Carolina, U.S.A. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
The End-Customer acknowledges that as a condition to receiving the System Warranty, End-Customer unconditionally submits to the jurisdiction of the North Carolina state and federal courts. If any portion of the System Warranty is not enforceable due to local legal requirements, then such specific language shall be modified to meet local legal requirements consistent with CommScope’s intent.
2. Leviton: Limited Lifetime
Product
Family
Product
Series
Standard Limited
Product Warranty
System Warranties -
Certified Projects
Category
Rated
Commercial
Grade
Structured
Cabling
System
Products
Copper
Systems
(Category 5e,
6, 6A, 8)
Fiber Optic
Systems
Fiber
Enclosures
Cable
Management
1-Year Limited Lifetime Warranty
for North America, Peru,
Columbia, and Ecuador
25-Years for Rest of World
Structured
Media
Enclosures
(Metal &
Plastic)
2-Years Limited Lifetime Warranty
for North America, Peru,
Columbia, and Ecuador
25-Years for Rest of World
Multiple Active 2-Years Not Applicable
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 742
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-6
Product
Family
Product
Series
Standard Limited
Product Warranty
System Warranties -
Certified Projects
Dwelling Unit
(MDU)
Systems
Telephone
Products
Active Video
Products
Active Data
Products
Commercial
Grade IT/AV
Products
Active
Audiovisual
Signal
Extension and
Audio
Components
2-Years Not Applicable
HDMI Cables 1-Year Not Applicable
Power
Distribution
Units (PDUs)
with Surge
Protection
5500 Series 3-Years Connected Equipment
Warranty Duration - 3-
Years
Pro-rated Connected
Equipment Coverage Max
- $25,000
5505 Series 3-Years Connected Equipment
Warranty Duration - 3-
Years
Pro-rated Connected
Equipment Coverage Max
- $10,000
P1070 Series 3-Years Connected Equipment
Warranty Duration - 3-
Years
Pro-rated Connected
Equipment Coverage Max
- $25,000
Power
Distribution
Units (PDUs)
4520 Series 3-Years Not Applicable
P1020 / P1040
Series
3-Years Not Applicable
3. SYSTEM WARRANTY AND EXCLUSIONS
a. Subject to the limitations and conditions set forth herein, Leviton (the "Manufacturer”) warrant to the end-user, for the duration of the warranty, and not for the benefit of anyone else, that the structured cabling and connectivity hardware products (the “Products”) comprising the Leviton structured cabling system (the "System”) installed at the indicated project site will:
1) Be free from defects in material and workmanship.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 743
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-7
2) Meet or exceed applicable ratified TIA and ISO/IEC link/channel transmission performance standards in effect at the time of installation. 3) Support any current or future application which is designed for transmission over a structured cabling system as defined by the above referenced standards in effect at the time of installation.
b. Warranty Exclusions
1) Products used in the System, which were not specifically designated as being eligible for coverage under this warranty.
2) Products used in the System, which were not supplied directly by the Manufacturer or through channels approved by the Manufacturer. 3) Products used in the System, which were falsely or incorrectly represented as being in compliance with the warranty registration requirements of this warranty or were not included in the registration documents that were submitted to obtain coverage under this warranty.
4) Defects caused by work performed outside of the Leviton work area, patching or equipment cords, or from moves, additions, and changes by parties other than a Certified Integrator/Installer, or an authorized contractor or personnel of the Manufacturer.
5) Defects resulting from non-compliant or improper System design, installation, use, repair or System alterations, misuse, neglect, accident or abuse.
6) Defects or System failures caused by events beyond reasonable control of the Manufacturer including, without limitation, act or omissions of customer, acts of God or government, such as, natural disasters or storms, fire, flood, water damage, paint or chemicals exposure, political strife, labor disputes, failure or delay of transportation, or unavailability of parts or personnel. 7) Products and System exposed to fire, smoke, water, paint, chemicals, solvents, or other elements for which the product was not designed. 8) Products and System exposed to operating conditions outside of the product’s stated ratings or intended use.
9) Power over Ethernet (PoE), Power over HDBASE-T (POH) and Remote Powering Applications: Leviton structured cabling products are designed and tested to be compliant with the electrical requirements for PoE, PoE+, POH, and remote powering applications as specified in the IEC 60512-99- 001 standard. Remote powering applications in which the electrical energy or connector cycling exceeds the defined operating requirements of IEC 60512-99-001 may lead to excessive arcing damage to the connector interface and are not covered under this warranty.
c. Warranty Remedy
1) For valid warranty claims, the Manufacturer will, at its sole discretion, using a Certified Integrator/Installer or personnel of the Manufacturer’s choosing replace, repair, or provide credit for any qualified System products found to be non-compliant and cover reasonable costs of labor to affect necessary work.
d. Warranty Limitations
1) This warranty is exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties, whether express, implied or statutory, including but not limited to any Warranty of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose, non-infringement or any other matter. The remedies provided for in the preceding paragraphs shall constitute the sole remedy of end-user, against the manufacturer for breach of any obligations to end user, whether the claim is made in tort or in contract, including claims based on Warranty, negligence, strict liability, fraud, misrepresentation, or otherwise.
2) In no event shall Manufacturer be liable for special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages (regardless of the form of action, whether in contract or in tort, including negligence), including without limitation, lost October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 744
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-8
sales or profits, lost data, System downtime, System outages, loss of use of the System or economic damage arising out of the failure of the System or the Products that form part of the System. The maximum aggregate liability of the Manufacturer for any claims for damage arising out of or connected with this warranty shall not exceed the end user/customer price paid for the Products giving rise to a claim. Labor claims will be paid in the form of product credit for the replacement or repair of only the defective product(s). 3) This warranty is non-transferable and shall not benefit any party or parties other than the stated System end-user, first to use the system and is subject to the individual Product warranty Terms & Conditions of the Manufacturer. 4) This warranty does not cover Systems which are no longer in use or which are no longer used for their originally intended purpose. e. Warranty Claims Requirements
1) Proper System design, installation, use and maintenance must be demonstrated to the Manufacturer.
2) System documentation and maintenance records, all of which are the responsibility of the end-user, must be made available upon request. Enduser shall provide free access to the System to original Certified Integrator/Installer, and the Manufacturer authorized personnel. f. Claim Procedure
1) Valid claims require the end-user to first resolve all non-connectivity hardware and non-cable related causes.
2) Warranty claims shall promptly be first made to the original Certified Integrator/Installer or the local representative of the Manufacturer. Proof of warranty must be furnished by person making claim.
3) System repair or replacement due to component failure will be performed only after the Manufacturer has reviewed and verified the System fails to meet the applicable ratified TIA and ISO/IEC link/channel transmission performance standards in effect at the time of installation prior to removal, replacement, or repair of any defective System Products.
4. Panduit: 25 Years
a. Contractor shall provide a 25-year Panduit Certification PlusSM System Warranty on all copper and fiber links and/or channels.
b. Panduit® Certification PlusSM warranty shall meet the following criteria:
1) A 25-year guarantee that the installed cabling system will pass the Commercial Building Telecommunications Standards cited in this document. 2) This warranty will cover all registered links and/or channels. 3) Contractor shall indicate in warranty documentation whether registered links are to be link or channel.
4) If links are covered, this warranty may be invoked only if the links are comprised entirely of Panduit components and cable.
5) If channels are covered, this warranty may be invoked only if entire channel links are comprised of continuous Panduit comp
c. The communications Contractor will correct any problems and malfunctions that are warranty–related issues without charge for the entire warranty period. d. If the Certification PlusSM warranty is needed by the owner within the warranted period and the original installer is no longer in business, Panduit shall find a substitute Panduit ONESM certified contractor and assume costs to fulfill the obligations of the warranty.
e. Upon acceptance of the warranty paperwork and test results from the Contractor, Panduit will mail a notification letter to the installer and a notification letter with warranty certificate to the owner
f. The warranty period shall commence following the final acceptance of the project by the owner and written confirmation of warranty from Panduit.
5. Or approved equivalent.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 745
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-9
C. In addition, provide:
1. Labor, materials, and documentation according to selected manufacturer requirements necessary to ensure that the Owner will be furnished with an Extended Product Warranty and Application Assurance. The Application Assurance Warranty will cover the failure of the wiring system to support current or future applications that are designed for the link/channel specifications of ANSI/TIA-568-C.1. These applications include, but are not limited to, 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, 1000BASE-T, 10GBASE-T and 155 Mb/s ATM.
2. A warranty on the physical installation and manufacturer defects.
3. Necessary documentation required by the manufacturer immediately following 100 percent testing of cables.
D. Administer the warranty process with the responsible manufacturer's representative. Provide warranty directly to the Owner from the manufacturer. Ensure that the manufacturer provides the Owner with the appropriate warranty certification within 90 calendar days of the final project completion.
1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a standards-based structured cabling system (SCS) to serve horizontal communication systems requirements as specified and as shown on Drawings. Closely follow ANSI/TIA, BICSI, IEEE, and ISO standards.
B. The horizontal distribution subsystem refers to intrabuilding and in some instances or conditions interbuilding twisted-pair communications cabling connecting telecommunications rooms (TRs) to telecommunications outlets (TOs) or work area outlets (WAOs) at individual work areas, and identified network device locations that consists of the following:
1. Category 6A 100 ohm, 4-pair, unshielded twisted pair cables from the telecom rooms to the outlets.
2. The horizontal system includes cables, insert outlets, faceplates, patch panels and patch cords, wall field termination blocks, as well as the necessary cabling support systems, such as cable management.
3. Cables are routed through basket tray, cable runway, conduit, fire rated pathways, JHooks, sleeves spaces below raised floors, open ceiling areas, non-ventilated spaces above ceiling tile and through plenum air-handling spaces above ceiling tile.
4. Furnish and install materials and miscellaneous items that are necessary for a complete and working system.
1.8 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Final closeout documents including, but not limited to, test results on a CD-ROM or USB drive, in native tester format, project manual that includes manufacturer and contractor warranties, product cut sheets, material submittals, etc. Also, include the following:
1. Electronic files in raw native tester software format, PDF, and hard copy documentation of test results for every cable and cable segment and link in 3- ring binder.
2. Provide ''As-Built'' Drawings in same AutoCAD Version as provided by Contractor in Part 1 Submittals of this document.
3. ''As-Built'' Drawings indicating location of all equipment including but not limited to work area outlets, patch panels, cross connect blocks, on each segment and cable routing outlet and identifiers. Indicate labeling for each piece of equipment.
4. As-Built Drawings will contain all installed cabling and materials. Outlets will be numbered with each cable associated with the work area outlet.
B. Place a laminated full–size, minimum “C” sized, floor plan of these drawings (coordinate with Owner) on the wall of each telecommunications room (TR), showing area covered, data locations, and cable labeling.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 746
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-10
1. Provide owner with a PDF and Autocad file and/or Revit for the final as-built, to adequately maintain current conditions for all future moves, adds, and changes (MACs).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STATION CABLING
A. Category 6A Unshielded Twisted Pair: 100 ohm, Category 6A, 23 AWG, Solid Conductor, 4-pair unshielded twisted pair, UL Listed CMP - LP (.6A - .7A) rated. Compliant to TIA-568.2-D-2 Balanced Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard Addendum 2 August 2020.
1. All cabling shall incorporate the use of permanent labeling, with labels furnished and installed by contractor within 4-inch to 6-inch of each cable end. Labels are required at both the station end behind the faceplate and at the patch panel termination.
2. Manufacturer:
a. Panduit: Turn Tell
1) Part Number: R100X125X1J
b. No Substitutions.
B. Horizontal Cabling:
1. Manufacturer:
a. CommScope
1) Systimax 2091B, Category 6A, CMP, Cable Diameter: 0.285-inch. (a) Part Numbers:
(1) 760107201 - Blue
(2) 760154039 - Light Blue
(3) 760107268 - White
(4) 760107250 - Slate
(5) 760107276 - Yellow
(6) 760107219 - Green
(7) 760107201 - Red
(8) 760107235 - Purple
(9) 760118497 - Pink
(10) 760107235 - Orange
(11) 760185900 - Black
2) Outside Plant (OSP), Category 6A, Indoor/Outdoor, Plenum, Cable Diameter: 0.270-inch.
(a) Part Numbers:
(1) 874019204 - Blue
(2) 874033804 - White
(3) 874021504 - Gray
(4) 874036404 - Black
b. Leviton
1) LANmark-SST Category 6A, CMP – LP (.7A), Cable Diameter: 0.250-inch. (a) Part Numbers:
(1) 11140627 - Blue
(2) 11140628 - White
(3) 11140629 - Dark Gray
(4) 11140630 - Yellow
(5) 11140631 - Green
(6) 11140632 - Red
(7) 11140634 - Violet
(8) 11140635 - Orange
(9) 11140633 - Black
2) LANmark-10G, OSP, Category 6A, Cable Diameter: 0.355-inch. c. Panduit
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 747
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-11
1) GenSPEED 10 MTP, Category 6A, CMP, Cable Diameter: 0.230-inch. (a) Part Numbers: (Color(s) to be approved by owner prior to purchase and installation)
(1) 7151849 - Blue
(2) 7151850 - White
(3) 7151851 - Gray
(4) 7151852 - Yellow
(5) 7151853 - Green
(6) 7151854 - Red
(7) 7151855 - Purple
(8) 7151856 - Orange
(9) 7151857 - Pink
(10) 7151858 - Black
2) Panduit Vari-Matrix High Density Category 6A, CMP – LP (.7A), Cable Diameter: 0.230-inch.
(a) Part Number: (Color(s) to be approved by owner prior to purchase and installation)
(1) PUP6AHD04BU-G - Blue
(2) PUP6AHD04BU-G - White
(3) PUP6AHD04IG-G - International Gray
(4) PUP6AHD04YL-G - Yellow
(5) PUP6AHD04GR-G - Green
(6) PUP6AHD04BU-G - Red
(7) PUP6AHD04VL-G - Violet
(8) PUP6AHD04OR-G - Orange
(9) PUP6AHD04BU-G - Black
3) Panduit TX6A Category 6A, OSP, Indoor/Outdoor, CMP-LP (.8A), Color Black.
(a) Part Number: PUO6AS04BL-G
4) General Cable, Category 6A, OSP, Indoor/Outdoor, CMP, Color Black. (a) Part Number: 7141007
d. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 INSERT OUTLETS
A. Manufacturer:
1. CommScope
a. GigaSPEED X10D, Category 6A, 8-position 8-Conductor (8P8C), modular inserts.
Colors are to be approved by Owner for each system, prior to purchase and installation.
1) MGS600 X10D Part Numbers: (Color(s) to be approved by Owner prior to purchase and installation)
(a) 760092361 - MGS600-003 - Black
(b) 760092379 - MGS600-112 - Orange
(c) 760092387 - MGS600-123 - Yellow
(d) 760092478 - MGS600-148 - Almond
(e) 760092395 - MGS600-215 - Cream
(f) 760092403 - MGS600-226 - Green
(g) 760092411 - MGS600-246 - Ivory
(h) 760092429 - MGS600-262 - White
(i) 760092437 - MGS600-270 - Gray
(j) 760092445 - MGS600-317 - Red
(k) 760092452 - MGS600-318 - Blue
(l) 760092460 - MGS600-361 - Violet
2. Leviton
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 748
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-12
a. Atlas-X1 Category 6A, 8-position 8-Conductor (8P8C), QuickPort Insert. With Shutter, UL 2043 Plenum Certified.
1) Will exceed IEEE 802.3bt standard up to 0.5 amps per conductor (100 watts) continuously.
2) ETL verified to meet the IEC 60512-99-002 standard for support of IEEE 802.3bt Type 4 PoE (90-watt) applications. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D (Cat 6A). 3) ISO/IEC 11801-1 (Class EA). ANSI/TIA-1096-A (formerly FCC Part 68). 4) IEEE 802.3bt PoE Type 1 (15.4 Watts) formerly 802.3af, Type 2 (30 Watts) formerly 802.3at, Type 3 (60 Watts), Type 4 (90 Watts). Cisco UPoE (60 Watts), UPoE+ (90 Watts).
b. Power over HDBaseT™ PoH (95 Watts).
1) Part Numbers: (Color(s) to be approved by Owner prior to purchase and installation)
(a) 6AUJK-SW6 - White
(b) 6AUJK-ST6 - Almond
(c) 6AUJK-SI6 - Ivory
(d) 6AUJK-SY6 - Yellow
(e) 6AUJK-SO6 - Orange
(f) 6AUJK-SC6 - Crimson
(g) 6AUJK-SR6 - Red
(h) 6AUJK-SP6 - Purple
(i) 6AUJK-SL6 - Blue
(j) 6AUJK-SV6 - Green
(k) 6AUJK-SG6 - Gray
(l) 6AUJK-SE6 - Black
(m) 6AUJK-SB6 - Brown
3. Panduit
a. Component of the MaTrix 10Gig Mini-Com TX6A Solution. Category 6A, 8-position 8-Conductor (8P8C), Shuttered Modular insert shall terminate 4-pairs, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm unshielded twisted pair cable and shall not require use of a punch down tool. The termination cap shall be color-coded blue to designate Category 6A performance and shall include a universal label coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. The Mini-Com® TX6A™ 10Gig UTP Jack Module must be installed as part of the TX6A™ 10Gig UTP Copper Cabling System to achieve IEEE 10GBASE-T certified performance.
b. Rated for 2500 cycles with IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at and 802.3bt type 3 and type 4.
Supports Power over HDBaseT up to 100 watts.
c. UL 1863 (Use as communications circuit accessory).
d. UL 2043 (Suitable for use in air-handling spaces).
e. Part Numbers: (Color(s) to be approved by Owner prior to purchase and installation)
1) CJH6X88TGIW - Off White
2) CJH6X88TGEI - Electric Ivory
3) CJH6X88TGIG - International Gray
4) CJH6X88TGAW - Arctic White
5) CJH6X88TGBL - Black
6) CJH6X88TGBU - Blue
7) CJH6X88TGRD - Red
8) CJH6X88TGYL - Yellow
9) CJH6X88TGGR - Green
10) CJH6X88TGOR - Orange
11) CJH6X88TGBR - Brown
12) CJH6X88TGGD - Gold
13) CJH6X88TGLB - Light Blue
14) CJH6X88TGPK - Pink
15) CJH6X88TGVL - Violet
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 749
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-13
16) EGJT-1 - Termination tool
(a) Ensures conductors are fully terminated by utilizing a smooth forward motion without impact on critical internal components for maximum reliability.
17) TGJT - Termination tool
(a) Ideal for high volume installations.
18) CWST - Wire Snipping Tool
19) CJAST - Cable Stripping Tool
4. Or approved equivalent.
2.3 FACE PLATES
A. Color(s) to be approved by Owner and coordinated with architectural finishes prior to purchase and installation. All unused ports shall have a matching dust cover blank installed by Contractor.
B. Face Plates must have window designations (DESI’s) for labeling.
C. Manufacturer:
1. CommScope
a. Single Gang:
1) Wall Phone, Stainless Steel Type Flush Mounted Faceplate, one-port, phone studs, 4-inch lug spacing.
(a) Part Number: 760100891 – M10LW4SP
2) Wall Phone, Stainless Steel Type Flush Mounted Faceplate, two port, phone studs.
(a) Part Number: 760249557
3) One-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108258401 – M10L-003 – Black
(b) 108258419 – M10L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108258427 – M10L-262 – White
(d) 108258435 – M10L-270 – Gray
(e) 760072074 – M11SP-L – Stainless
4) Two-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108168485 – M12L-003 – Black
(b) 108168477 – M12L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108168469 – M12L-262 – White
(d) 108168451 – M12L-270 – Gray
(e) 760072181 – M12SP-L – Stainless
5) Three-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108168527 – M13L-003 – Black
(b) 108168519 – M13L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108168501 – M13L-262 – White
(d) 108168493 – M13L-270 – Gray
(e) 76002199 – M13SP-L – Stainless
6) Four-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108168568 – M14L-003 – Black
(b) 108168550 – M14L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108168543 – M14L-262 – White
(d) 108168535 – M14L-270 – Gray
(e) 760072207 – M14SP-L – Stainless
7) Six-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108168600 – M16L-003 – Black
(b) 108168592 – M16L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108168584 – M16L-262 – White
(d) 108168576 – M16L-270 – Gray
(e) 760072215 – M16SP-L – Stainless
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 750
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-14
b. Double Gang:
1) Eight-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108685009 – M28L-003 – Black
(b) 108685017 – M28L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108685025 – M28L-262 – White
(d) 760100883 – M28SP-L – Stainless
c. Surface Mount Box (SMB):
1) One-Port: Part Number:
(a) 107983983 – M101SMB-B-003 – Black
(b) 107984007 – M101SMB-B-246 – Ivory
(c) 107984023 – M101SMB-B-270 – Gray
(d) 107984015 – M101SMB-B-262 – White
2) Two-Port: Part Number:
(a) 760067207 – M202 Plenum SMB-262
(b) 107984031 – M102SMB-B-003 – Black
(c) 107984049 – M102SMB-B-246 – Ivory
(d) 107984056 – M102SMB-B-262 – White
(e) 107984064 – M102SMB-B-270 – Gray
3) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) 107952475 – M104SMB-A-003 – Black
(b) 107952442 – M104SMB-A-246 – Ivory
(c) 107952459 – M104SMB-A-262 – White
(d) 107952467 – M104SMB-A-270 – Gray
4) Six-Port: Part Number:
(a) 107431520 – M106SMB-003 – Black
(b) 107431546 – M106SMB-246 – Ivory
(c) 107431538 – M106SMB-262 – White
(d) 107431553 – M106SMB-270 – Gray
5) (12) Port: Part Number:
(a) 106658164 – M112SMB-003 – Black
(b) 106658149 – M112SMB-246 – Ivory
(c) 106658156 – M112SMB-262 – White
(d) 106658419 – M112SMB-270 – Gray
d. Furniture - Includes all material for adapters and bezels. It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide and install a furniture faceplate solution that will be compatible with the furniture systems.
1) Four-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 760118240 – M14CE-E-003 – Black
(b) 760118232 – M14CE-E-262 – White
(c) 760118257 – M14CE-E-246 – Ivory
(d) 760118265 – M14CE-E-270 – Gray
2) Used with SL, SLX outlets.
(a) 1933134-1 – 4-Port, Black, Flexmode
(b) 1933134-2 – 4-Port, Light Almond, Flexmode
(c) 1933134-4 – 4-Port, Gray, Flexmode
e. Dust Cover Blank.
1) Dust cover blanks shall be installed by contractor for all faceplates where an insert is not M20 installed. For M-Series Faceplates and inserts. (a) Part Number:
(1) 107065583 – M20AP-003 – Black
(2) 107067860 – M20AP-246 – Ivory
(3) 107067928 – M20AP-262 – White
(4) 107067951 – M20AP-270 – Gray
2. Leviton
a. Single Gang, QuickPort wall plate with ID windows:
1) Wall phone wall plate, recessed stainless steel, QuickPort.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 751
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-15
(a) Part Number: 4108W-1SP
2) Wall phone wall plate, stainless steel, QuickPort.
(a) Part Number: 4108W-SP
3) One-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-1WS – White
(b) 42080-1TS – Light Almond
(c) 42080-1IS – Ivory
(d) 42080-1GS – Grey
(e) 42080-1ES – Black
4) Two-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-2WS – White
(b) 42080-2TS – Light Almond
(c) 42080-2IS – Ivory
(d) 42080-2GS – Grey
(e) 42080-2ES – Black
5) Four-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-4WS – White
(b) 42080-4TS – Light Almond
(c) 42080-4IS – Ivory
(d) 42080-4GS – Grey
(e) 42080-4ES – Black
b. Double Gang:
1) Six-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-6WP – White
(b) 42080-6TP – Light Almond
(c) 42080-6IP – Ivory
(d) 42080-GP – Grey
(e) 42080-6EP – Black
2) Eight-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-6WP – White
(b) 42080-6TP – Light Almond
(c) 42080-6IP – Ivory
(d) 42080-8GSp – Grey
(e) 42080-8EP – Black
3) (12) Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-12W – White
(b) 42080-12T – Light Almond
(c) 42080-12I – Ivory
(d) 42080-12G – Grey
(e) 42080-12E – Black
c. Surface Mount Box (SMB), QuickPort Inserts:
1) One- Port: Plenum Rated Part Number:
(a) 41089-1WP – White
(b) 41089-1EP – Black
(c) 41089-1IP – Ivory
(d) 41089-1GP – Grey
2) Two-Port: Plenum Rated Part Number:
(a) 41089-2WP – White
(b) 41089-2EP – Black
(c) 41089-2TP – Light Almond
(d) 41089-2IP – Ivory
(e) 41089-2WGP – Grey
3) QuickPort Brackets, Part Numbers:
(a) 49223-CB0 – QuickPort, In-Ceiling Bracket.
(b) 49223-CBC – QuickPort, In-Ceiling Bracket with Drop Ceiling Clip Kit. (c) 49223-W10 – QuickPort WAP (WiFi) Kit, Two Ports.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 752
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-16
(1) Two, C6A, (6AUJK-RW6-White) Atlas-X1 Inserts
(2) One, QuickPort Ceiling Bracket (49223-CBC)
(3) One, White, Two-Port Surface Mount Box (Plenum Rated) (4S089-2WP)
(4) Two, CMP, C6A solid conductor patch cords (AXPPP-10W) 10ft, White
(d) 49223-W1C – QuickPort (WiFi) Kit, One Port.
(1) One, C6A (6AUJK-RW6-White) Atlas-X1 Insert
(2) One, QuickPort Ceiling Bracket (49223-CBC)
(3) One, White, Two-Port Surface Mount Box (Plenum Rated) (4S089-2WP) (CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND FURNISH
ONE BLANK)
(4) One, CMP, C6A solid conductor patch cord (AXPPP-10W) 10’, White
4) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) 41089-4WP – White
(b) 41089-4EP – Black
(c) 41089-4IP – Ivory
(d) 41089-4GP – Grey
5) Six-Port: Part Number:
(a) 41089-6WP – White
(b) 41089-6EP – Black
(c) 41089-6IP – Ivory
(d) 41089-6GP – Grey
6) (12) Port: Part Number:
(a) 41089-12W – White
(b) 41089-12E – Black
(c) 41089-12I – Ivory
(d) 41089-12G – Grey
7) Surface Mount Housing Magnets, four, per pack:
(a) Part Number: 41030-SMJ
d. Furniture Faceplates - Includes all material for adapters and bezels for use with QuickPort Inserts. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide and install a furniture faceplate solution that will be compatible with the project selected furniture systems.
1) Two-Port: Part Number:
(a) 49910-SW2 – White
(b) 49910-HW2 – White (Herman Miller)
(c) 49910-SE2 – Black
(d) 49910-HE2 – Black (Herman Miller)
(e) 49910-SI2 – Ivory
(f) 49910-HI2 – Ivory (Herman Miller)
(g) 49910-SG2 – Grey
(h) 49910-HG2 – Grey (Herman Miller)
2) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) 49910-SW4 – White
(b) 49910-EW4 – White (0.75-inch Extended Depth)
(c) 49910-HW4 – White (Herman Miller)
(d) 49910-SE4 – Black
(e) 49910-EE4 – Black (0.75-inch Extended Depth)
(f) 49910-HE4 – Black (Herman Miller)
(g) 49910-SI4 – Ivory
(h) 49910-EI4 – Ivory (0.75-inch Extended Depth)
(i) 49910-HI4 – Ivory (Herman Miller)
(j) 49910-SG4 – Grey
(k) 49910-EG4 – Grey (0.75-inch Extended Depth)
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 753
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-17
(l) 49910-HG4 – Grey (Herman Miller)
3. Panduit
a. Single Gang:
1) Wall Phone, Pan-Net, Mini-Com
(a) KWPY - Stainless Steel, Phone Plate
(b) Requires a NET-Key Keystone C6A insert
(1) Part Number: NK6X88MBL
(c) One-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(1) CFPL1WHY – White
(2) CFPL1EIY – Electric Ivory
(3) CFPL1BLY – Black
(4) CFPL1IGY – International Gray
(d) Two-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(1) CFPL2WHY – White
(2) CFPL2EIY – Electric Ivory
(3) CFPL2BLY – Black
(4) CFPL2IGY – International Gray
(5) CFPL2SY – Stainless Steel
(e) Four-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(1) CFPL4WHY – White
(2) CFPL4EIY – Electric Ivory
(3) CFPL4BLY – Black
(4) CFPL4IGY – International Gray
(5) CFPL4SY – Stainless Steel
b. Double Gang:
1) Four-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(a) CFPL4S-2GY – Stainless
2) Six-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(a) CFPL6S-2GY – Stainless
3) Eight-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(a) CFPL8S-2GY – Stainless Steel
4) Ten-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(a) CFPE10WH-2GY – White
(b) CFPE10EI-2GY – Electric Ivory
(c) CFPE10IG-2GY – International Gray
(d) CFPE10BL-2GY – Black
(e) CFPL10S-2GY – Stainless Steel
c. Surface Mount Box (SMB):
1) Single Gang Surface Back Box.
2) One-Port: Part Number:
(a) CBX1WH-A – White
3) Two-Port: Part Number:
(a) CBX2WH-AY – White
4) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) CBX4WH-AY – White
5) Six-Port: Part Number:
(a) CBX6WH-AY – White
d. Furniture - Includes all material for adapters and bezels. It is the contractor's responsibility to provide and install a furniture faceplate solution that will be compatible with the furniture systems.
1) Two-Port: Part Number:
(a) CFFPL2BL – Black
2) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) CFFPL4BL – Black
(b) CFFPHM4BL – Black (Herman Miller)
e. Blank Modules, Mini-Com:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 754
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-18
1) Part Number:
(a) CMBWH-X – White
(b) CMBBL-X – Black
(c) CMBIW-X – International White
(d) CMBBIG -X – International Gray
f. Mini-Com adaptor for Wiremold Frames:
1) Part Number
(a) CHI2MBL-X – Black (two-ports)
g. Mini-Com Water Resistant Faceplate: Includes combination head, gaskets, tamper resistant screws to secure to base. Requires adhesive labeling suited for the environment it resides in.
1) Part Number:
(a) CFPWRCIG – International Gray
4. Or approved equivalent.
2.4 PATCH PANELS
A. Patch Panels shall be used to house insert outlets on the originating side of Horizontal Cabling, including, but not limited to, spaces such as the MPOE, MTR, TR, and/or TE. Patch Panels shall adhere to the following specifications:
1. Shall be constructed as a modular frame for use with modular insert outlets. a. Rack mounted Patch Panels are strongly preferred. However, wall mounted Patch Panels may be used when a Telecommunications rack, cabinet, or enclosure is unavailable or lacking the required space.
2. Shall be sized appropriately, and provided in sufficient quantity, to house the quantity of modular insert outlets required in the associated Telecommunications Space. a. Contractor shall include a future growth factor equal to +25% when determining the size and quantity of Patch Panels.
b. Approved Patch Panel sized are as follows:
1) 1RU 24-Port.
2) 2RU 48-Port.
3) 1RU 48-Port.
(a) Shall be used only as required due to rack space limitations.
3. Shall be by the same manufacturer as the associated modular insert outlets. a. Shall be of the same product line as the associated modular insert outlets, where applicable.
B. Universal Patch Panels:
1. 19-inch rack-mounted panel capable of accepting up to 24 modular insert outlets.
2. 19-inch rack-mounted panel capable of accepting up to 48 modular insert outlets.
2.5 PATCH CORDS
A. A. Category 6A patch cords shall be used to connect networked devices and networking equipment to the Horizontal Cabling and shall adhere to the following specifications:
1. Shall be factory terminated with eight-position eight-contact modular connectors.
2. Shall be constructed using (4) pairs of stranded conductor wire.
3. Shall be provided in lengths appropriate for the intended use, with slack sufficient to properly dress the cable in accordance with established industry best practices. a. Excess slack shall be minimized.
b. Individual Patch Cords shall not exceed 25-Feet in length.
4. Unless otherwise noted on the drawing package or within the specifications, when used within the Main Telecommunications Room, Telecommunications Room(s), and/or the MPOE, and when not entering or exiting the room through any cabling pathway system:
a. Shall be constructed using 26-28 AWG wire.
b. Shall be fire rated Communications Multipurpose (CM).
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 755
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-19
5. Unless otherwise noted on the drawing package or within the specifications, when used to connect a device located indoors to a telecommunications outlet located within the same space:
a. Shall be constructed using 23-28 AWG wire.
b. Shall be fire rated Communications Multipurpose, Plenum (CMP).
6. Unless otherwise noted on the drawing package or within the specifications, when used to connect a device located outdoors to a telecommunications outlet located indoors:
a. Shall be constructed using 23-28 AWG wire.
b. Shall be constructed with an outdoor rated, UV-resistant, weatherproof, jacket.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 756
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-1
SECTION 28 00 00
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1DESIGN-BUILD SUMMARY
A. Electronic Security System, including, but not limited to, the Access Control System, shall utilize a design-build concept throughout the duration of the project.
B. Electronic Safety System, including, but not limited to, the Fire Detection and Alarm System, shall utilize a design-bid-build concept throughout the duration of the project.
C. Work included in 28 00 00 applies to Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to make electronic safety and security systems ready for Owner's use for proposed project.
1.2 DESIGN-BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
A. This document is issued to give Bidders a basis for preparing a proposal to design and install a complete Electronic Safety and Security system for this project.
B. Alternates to this Document may be offered as a separate proposal.
1.3 DESIGN-BUILD APPROACH
A. Use this Specification for design/engineering requirements, workmanship and materials or construction. Utilize design-build concept throughout construction phase of project.
B. Investigate and be apprised of applicable codes, rules, and regulations as enforced by AHJ.
C. Visit the Site of the proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine conditions that affect this work.
1.4 DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Contents of Section apply to Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Specifications. Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements take precedence.
B. Access Control and Intrusion Detection Criteria:
1. The project includes the furnishing and installation of a fully functional Library Access Control System. Contractor is responsible for providing all hardware, components, cabling, programming, and labor required for the installation of this system.
2. The intended function of the Library Access Control System is to allow for staffless entry into the new Maker Space on the 2nd floor. The system shall allow for Patrons to access the Maker Space through the use of a software-based schedule, maintained by the Owner, or by using their Library Card.
3. This project includes (1) Access Control Card Reader location, however, the approved system shall allow for expansion to many additional Card Reader locations and Libraryfocused services in the future.
4. Refer to Section 28 10 00, Access Control and Intrusion Detection for additional information.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 757
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-2
1.5 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements applies to Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of electronic safety and security systems for proposed project.
B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.
C. Definitions:
1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.
3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installing, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished.
4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent," substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.
5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities having jurisdiction, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.
1.6 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section apply to Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Contract Documents.
B. Related Work:
1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. Drawings
c. Addenda
d. Owner/Architect Agreement
e. Owner/Contractor Agreement
f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits
C. Contents of Division 26, Electrical apply to this Section.
D. Comply with related products/systems requirements for Internet Protocol Communication devices located in Division 27:
1. Section 27 15 00, Communications Horizontal Cabling.
1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and those listed in this Section.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 758
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-3
B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:
1. State of California:
a. CBC - California Building Code
b. CEC - California Electrical Code
c. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
d. CFC - California Fire Code
e. CMC - California Mechanical Code
f. CPC - California Plumbing Code
g. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:
1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act
2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act
3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
4. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers
5. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
6. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process
7. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
8. ASTM - ASTM International
9. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations
10. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency
11. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
12. FM - FM Global
13. ISO - International Organization for Standardization
14. NEC - National Electric Code
15. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
16. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
17. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
18. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
19. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
D. See Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security individual Sections for additional references.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures.
B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.
C. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.
D. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section.
Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 759
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-4
E. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
F. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what difference, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications and drawings.
1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.
Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.
2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security specification Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements.
3. See Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security individual Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.
G. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review.
H. Resubmission Requirements: Make corrections or changes in submittals as required, and in consideration of Engineer’s comments. Identify Engineer’s comments and provide an individual response to each of the Engineer’s comments. Cloud changes in the submittals and further identify changes which are in response to Engineer’s comments.
I. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Equipment Importance Factor as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
J. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical and Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security submittals.
K. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.
L. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:
1. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional.
2. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor are required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 760
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-5
additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.
3. Where manufacturer equipment or model numbers are indicated with no exceptions, substitutions will be rejected.
M. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security specification Sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements.
2. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.
N. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.
O. Resubmission Requirements:
1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required by Architect/Engineer review comments. Provide submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment.
Cloud changes in the submittals.
2. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exception taken or "make corrections noted."
3. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.
P. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:
1. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Specification Sections for additional requirements for operations and maintenance manuals.
2. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
a. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
b. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes and quantities relevant to each piece of equipment.
c. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub-assemblies.
d. Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Sections.
e. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. f. Include copy of start-up and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. g. Include commissioning reports.
h. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 761
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-6
i. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format.
Arrange for additional reviews; Bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
3. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements Article titled "Demonstration."
4. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.
Q. Record Drawings:
1. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “as-constructed” conditions.
Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements and location of concealed items. Include items changed by addenda, field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.
2. Record Drawings are to include equipment locations, calculations, and schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.
3. At completion of project, input changes to original project on Revit Model and make one set of black-line drawings created from Revit Model in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit Revit Model and drawings upon substantial completion.
4. See Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security individual Sections for additional items to include in Record Drawings.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.
B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.
C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (e.g. cable tray, panels, etc.) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.
E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.
F. Provide products that are UL listed.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 762
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-7
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.
Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.
1.11 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet.
Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, fire protection, electrical, ceiling suspension, and ceiling tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.
B. Prepare Drawings as follows:
1. Drawings in Revit Model. Revit Model release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.
2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.
3. Indicate fittings, hangers, access panels, and elevation of bottom of cable tray above finished floor.
4. Drawings to indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout as shown on electrical drawings and architectural reflected ceiling drawings and HVAC equipment, ductwork.
5. Incorporate Addenda items and change orders.
6. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.
C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.
D. Verify in field exact size, location, and clearances of existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto.
E. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer, including but not limited to panels, devices and equipment unless otherwise specified in individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 763
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-8
2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.
B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.
C. Hazardous Materials:
1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.
2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.
3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
B. Install equipment having components requiring access (i.e., devices, equipment, electrical boxes, panels, etc.) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.
C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.
Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect and Engineer prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines.
D. Earthwork:
1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:
a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork divisions.
Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling.
b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.
E. Firestopping:
1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 764
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-9
2. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around conduit, raceway and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Fire Stops.
F. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums.
3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, and individual Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
B. Earthquake resistant designs for Electronic Safety and Security (Division 28) equipment to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.
C. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.
D. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of safety and security equipment during earthquake.
3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
B. Notify Architect and Engineer, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:
1. Prior to covering walls when electrical, safety and security systems installation is started.
2. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.
3. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.
C. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching Requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:
1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 765
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-10
Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).
2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.
3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.
Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.
4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, repair, refinish and leave in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.
5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.5 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.
3.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with the individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:
1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust.
2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs.
Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.
3. Protect devices, panels and similar items until in service.
4. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified factory certified instructor at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 766
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-11
3.8 CLEANING
A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28 Sections.
B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.
3.9 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to building structure. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Provide miscellaneous supports required for installation of equipment, conduit and wiring.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Confirm Painting requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.
In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:
1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces, i.e. hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.
2. In electrical and mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.
3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.
4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.
5. Conduit: Clean, primer coat and paint interior conduit exposed in finished areas with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces. Color selected by Architect.
3.11 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:
1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:
a. Cleaning
b. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
c. Training of Operating Personnel
d. Record Drawings
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 767
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-12
e. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates
f. Start-up/Test Documents and Commissioning Reports
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:
1. Tests:
a. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in Closeout Documents. b. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide appropriate personnel with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.
3.13 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement in the letter that electronic safety and security systems were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals.
Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in operating and maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 768
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-1
SECTION 28 00 01
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1DESIGN-BUILD SUMMARY
A. Work included in 28 00 01 applies to Division 28, Electronic Safety work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to make electronic safety systems ready for Owner's use for proposed project.
1.2 DESIGN-BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
A. This document is issued to give Bidders a basis for preparing a proposal to design and install a complete Electronic Safety system for this project.
B. Alternates to this Document may be offered as a separate proposal.
1.3 DESIGN-BUILD APPROACH
A. Use this Specification for design/engineering requirements, workmanship and materials or construction. Utilize design-build concept throughout construction phase of project.
B. Investigate and be apprised of applicable codes, rules, and regulations as enforced by AHJ.
C. Visit the Site of the proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine conditions that affect this work.
1.4 DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Contents of Section apply to Division 28, Electronic Safety Specifications. Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements take precedence.
B. Reference Basis of Design narrative document.
C. Fire Alarm Design Criteria: Refer to Section 28 31 00, Fire Detection and Alarm, for fire alarm system design criteria.
D. Fire Alarm Equipment: Refer to Section 28 31 00, Fire Detection and Alarm, for fire alarm equipment requirements.
1.5 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements applies to Division 28, Electronic Safety work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of electronic safety systems for proposed project.
B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 769
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-2
C. Definitions:
1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.
3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installing, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished.
4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent," substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.
5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities having jurisdiction, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.
1.6 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section apply to Division 28, Electronic Safety Contract Documents.
B. Related Work:
1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. Drawings
c. Addenda
d. Owner/Architect Agreement
e. Owner/Contractor Agreement
f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits
C. Contents of Division 26, Electrical apply to this Section.
1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and those listed in this Section.
B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:
1. State of California:
a. CBC - California Building Code
b. CEC - California Electrical Code
c. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
d. CFC - California Fire Code
e. CMC - California Mechanical Code
f. CPC - California Plumbing Code
g. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:
1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act
2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 770
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-3
3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
4. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers
5. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
6. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process
7. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
8. ASTM - ASTM International
9. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations
10. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency
11. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories
12. FM - FM Global
13. ISO - International Organization for Standardization
14. NEC - National Electric Code
15. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
16. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
17. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration
18. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
19. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
D. See Division 28, Electronic Safety individual Sections for additional references.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures.
B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.
C. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.
D. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section.
Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions.
E. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.
F. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what difference, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications and drawings.
1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.
Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.
2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Reference individual Division 28, October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 771
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-4
Electronic Safety specification Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements.
3. See Division 28, Electronic Safety individual Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.
G. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review.
H. Resubmission Requirements: Make corrections or changes in submittals as required, and in consideration of Engineer’s comments. Identify Engineer’s comments and provide an individual response to each of the Engineer’s comments. Cloud changes in the submittals and further identify changes which are in response to Engineer’s comments.
I. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Equipment Importance Factor as specified in Division 01 and in Structural documents.
J. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 28, Electronic Safety Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical and Division 28, Electronic Safety submittals.
K. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.
L. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:
1. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional.
2. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor are required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.
3. Where manufacturer equipment or model numbers are indicated with no exceptions, substitutions will be rejected.
M. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety specification Sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements.
2. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 772
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-5
N. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.
O. Resubmission Requirements:
1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required by Architect/Engineer review comments. Provide submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment.
Cloud changes in the submittals.
2. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exception taken or "make corrections noted."
3. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.
P. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:
1. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Specification Sections for additional requirements for operations and maintenance manuals.
2. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
a. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
b. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes and quantities relevant to each piece of equipment.
c. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub-assemblies.
d. Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Sections.
e. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. f. Include copy of start-up and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. g. Include commissioning reports.
h. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. i. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format.
Arrange for additional reviews; Bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
3. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements Article titled "Demonstration."
4. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.
Q. Record Drawings:
1. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “as-constructed” conditions.
Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements and location of concealed items. Include items changed by addenda, field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 773
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-6
2. Record Drawings are to include equipment locations, calculations, and schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.
3. At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD Files and drawings upon substantial completion.
4. See Division 28, Electronic Safety individual Sections for additional items to include in Record Drawings.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.
B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.
C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (e.g. cable tray, panels, etc.) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.
E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.
F. Provide products that are UL listed.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.
B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.
Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.
1.11 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet.
Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 774
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-7
coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, fire protection, electrical, ceiling suspension, and ceiling tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.
B. Prepare Drawings as follows:
1. Drawings in CAD Format. CAD format release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.
2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.
3. Indicate fittings, hangers, access panels, and elevation of bottom of cable tray above finished floor.
4. Drawings to indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout as shown on electrical drawings and architectural reflected ceiling drawings and HVAC equipment, ductwork.
5. Incorporate Addenda items and change orders.
6. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.
C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.
D. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacture, including but not limited to panels, devices and equipment unless otherwise specified in individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.
2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL, ETL, or FM listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.
B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.
C. Hazardous Materials:
1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.
2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.
3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 775
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.
B. Install equipment having components requiring access (i.e., devices, equipment, electrical boxes, panels, etc.) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.
C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.
Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines.
D. Earthwork:
1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents.
2. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:
a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork divisions.
Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling.
b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.
E. Firestopping:
1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.
2. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around conduit, raceway and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
F. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums.
3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, and individual Division 28 Electronic Safety Sections.
B. Earthquake resistant designs for Electronic Safety (Division 28) systems and equipment to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.
C. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 776
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-9
way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.
D. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of safety equipment during earthquake.
3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.
B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:
1. Underground conduit and wire installation prior to backfilling.
2. Prior to covering walls when electronic safety systems installation is started.
3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.
4. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.
C. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching Requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:
1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).
2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.
3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.
Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.
4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, repair, refinish and leave in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.
5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.5 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 777
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-10
3.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with the individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:
1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust.
2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs.
Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.
3. Protect devices, panels and similar items until in service.
4. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.
B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified factory certified instructor at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Confirm cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28 Sections.
B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.
3.9 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to building structure. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 778
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-11
C. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Provide miscellaneous supports required for installation of equipment, conduit and wiring.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Confirm Painting requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.
B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:
1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces, i.e. hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.
2. In electrical and mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.
3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.
4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.
5. Conduit: Clean, primer coat and paint interior conduit exposed in finished areas with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces. Color selected by Architect.
3.11 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions.
B. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:
1. Scope:
a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to electronic safety system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work.
b. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.
c. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access, access to different areas. Owner will cooperate to best of their ability to assist in coordinated schedule, but will remain final authority as to time of work permitted.
2. Examination:
a. Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. b. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. c. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
1) Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish work.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 779
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-12
2) Verify location and number of electronic safety system devices, panels, etc. in field.
d. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
3. Promptly notify Owner if systems are found which are not shown on Drawings.
4. Execution:
a. Remove existing electronic safety equipment, devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless shown as retained or relocated on Drawings. b. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain electrical continuity of existing systems during construction. Remove or relocate electrical boxes, conduit, wiring and equipment as encountered in removed or remodeled areas in existing construction affected by this work.
c. Remove and restore wiring which serves usable existing outlets clear of construction or demolition.
d. If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, provide new conduit and wire to bypass abandoned outlets. e. If existing conduits pass through partitions or ceiling which are being removed or remodeled, provide new conduit and wire to reroute clear of construction or demolition and maintain service to existing load.
f. Extend circuiting and devices in existing walls to be furred out. g. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
h. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
i. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.
j. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
k. Remove abandoned wiring to leave site clean.
l. If existing electrical equipment contains PCBs (Polychlorinated Biphenyl), replace with new non-PCB equipment. Dispose of material containing PCBs as required by federal and local regulations.
m. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work. n. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
5. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service during construction.
Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. a. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system. b. Notify local fire service.
c. Make notifications at least five working days in advance. d. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.12 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:
1. Cleaning
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3. Training of Operating Personnel
4. Record Drawings
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 780
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-13
5. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates
6. Start-up/Test Documents and Commissioning Reports
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and conduct the following tests:
1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in Closeout Documents.
2. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide appropriate personnel with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.
3.14 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement in letter that electronic safety systems were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals.
B. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in operating and maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 781
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-1
SECTION 28 10 00
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SCOPE OF WORK
A. The project includes the provision and installation of a fully functional Library Access Control System. Contractor is responsible for providing all hardware, components, cabling, and programming required for the installation of this system.
B. The intended function of the Library Access Control System is to allow for staffless entry into the new Maker Space on the 2nd floor. The system shall allow for Patrons to access the Maker Space through the use of a software-based schedule, maintained by the Owner, or by using their Library Card.
C. This project includes (1) Access Control Card Reader location, however, the approved system shall allow for expansion to many additional Card Reader locations and Library-focused services in the future.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work included:
1. Security Management System (SMS)
2. Access Control System Main Control Panel
3. Access Control System Door Control Panel
4. Card Reader
5. Access Control Cards
6. Request to Exit Device (REX)
7. Electric Latch or Strike (provided by others - see door hardware schedule)
8. Power Supply
9. Cable and Wire
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
1.4 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. Federal Information Processing Standard Publication 201-1, Personal Identity Verification (PIV) of Federal Employees and Contractors. (FIPS 201-1)
2. Homeland Security Presidential Standard Directive 12: Policy for a Common Identification Standard for Federal Employees and Contractors. (HSPD-12)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 782
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Security Management System (SMS):
1. Bibliotheca
2. Lyngsoe
3. Honeywell
4. AMAG
5. LenelS2
6. Or approved equivalent.
B. Access Control System Main Control Panel:
1. Bibliotheca
2. Lyngsoe
3. Honeywell
4. AMAG
5. LenelS2
6. Or approved equivalent.
C. Access Control System Door Control Panel:
1. Bibliotheca
2. Lyngsoe
3. Honeywell
4. AMAG
5. LenelS2
6. Or approved equivalent.
D. Card Reader:
1. Bibliotheca
2. Lyngsoe
3. HID
4. Or approved equivalent.
E. Access Control Cards:
1. Bibliotheca
2. Lyngsoe
3. HID
4. Or approved equivalent.
F. Request to Exit Device (REX):
1. Bosch
2. Or approved equivalent.
G. Electric Latch or Strike: Provided by others; see door hardware schedule.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 783
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-3
H. Power Supply:
1. 1. Bibliotheca
2. Lyngsoe
3. Altronix
4. Or approved equivalent.
I. Cable and Wire:
1. West Penn Wire
2. Or approved equivalent.
2.2 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS)
A. Furnish and install the Following:
1. An SMS that is capable of controlling and monitoring the access control system.
2. An SMS that is designed to control and/or interface with industry standard OEM equipment.
3. An SMS that uses modular architecture to allow easy integration of the following capabilities/equipment:
a. Access Control
b. Intrusion detection
c. Elevator control.
d. Time and attendance.
e. CCTV system integration.
f. Alarm receiver interface.
g. Badging capabilities.
h. Employee and visitor database.
4. Provide one server license and four client licenses.
5. All SMS software to reside within the controller and be through a standard web browser.
6. Up to 25 users to able to operate, monitor and control the entire system with a user ID and password.
7. Software will have the following:
a. User rights setup and password assignment.
b. Centralized access control and alarm transactions monitoring. c. Remote control functions for access control, arming/disarming of alarm points and on/off controls. d. Card database administration.
e. Report generation of transactions.
2.3 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM MAIN CONTROL PANEL
A. Furnish and install the Following:
1. A main access control system control panel that has the overall system intelligence, any required additional input/output boards and the communications controllers required for remote monitoring and control.
2. An access control system main panel that is modular and can have optional systems and functionality added per project requirements.
3. Control Panel Requirements:
a. 32-bits CPU.
b. Minimum speed of 500MHZ.
c. Must support standard RS 232, Ethernet and remote dial in via modem. d. Minimum 512Mb of flash memory.
e. Minimum 512Mb of RAM.
f. Supports up to 64 channels for alarm monitoring and 64 channels of voltage free relays for alarm signaling.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 784
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-4
g. The TO consist of at least one CPU board, two card readers, controller board, one eight channel input and output board, AC line filter, regulated power supply unit with online battery charger. h. Control panel board to support four industry standard Wiegand compatible reader interface ports, provide digital input interfaces to door status sensors and form-C relay output interfaces to door strikes.
2.4 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DOOR CONTROL PANEL
A. The local door controller to consist of a scalable architecture, allowing the monitoring and control of single or multiple doors per controller.
B. Door controller to utilize on-board microprocessors and database storage to allow for off-network door control capabilities.
C. Door controller to be connected and managed through Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 or wireless communications.
D. Door controller is to match the brand manufacturer of the main access control panel and operate in conjunction with that system.
2.5 CARD READER
A. Furnish and install card readers at locations indicated on the Drawings. Mounting height to be 48-inches unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Furnish and install a single gang size, wall mount proximity card reader or mullion mount card reader on store front applications.
C. Card Readers to be suitable for indoor or outdoor use.
D. Card Readers to be ADA compliant.
2.6 ACCESS CONTROL CARDS
A. 13.56 MHz Proximity Cards.
2.7 REQUEST TO EXIT DEVICE (REX)
A. Furnish and install a REX at each door indicated on the Drawings.
B. Coordinate with the door hardware schedule for type of device required.
C. If the REX is not built into the door hardware, install a surface mount passive infrared sensor (PIR) type device per architect's direction.
2.8 ELECTRIC LATCH OR STRIKE
A. Provided by others; see door hardware schedule.
2.9 POWER SUPPLY
A. Furnish and install power supplies for the access control panels, intrusions panels and other system devices that has an integral battery for backup.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 785
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-5
B. Power supply converts 115VAC/60Hz input into eight independently controlled 12VDC or 24VDC fail safe and/or fail secure outputs with a total of 6 amp continuous supply current. Power supply has built in charger for backup batteries.
C. Back up battery is 12V, 0.7 amp rechargeable, sealed and maintenance free with a two hour run time.
D. Size power supply(s) so there is 20 percent spare capacity for future devices.
E. Install in a UL listed enclosure.
2.10 CABLE AND WIRE
A. Copper:
1. Power: 18 AWG, 2 pair, unshielded twisted pair.
2. RS-232: 18 AWG, 4 conductor, shielded.
3. Category 6A cabling to match that installed by the telecom contractor in Division 27, Communications.
4. Indicate all other wire required by manufacturer installation instructions on submittal Drawings and diagrams.
5. All cabling to be plenum rated where required.
B. Connectors:
1. Modular connector.
2. 24 V Power: Screw-down on spade lug.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 786
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-1
SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Photoelectric Type Detectors
2. Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors
3. Combination Horn/Strobes
4. Strobes
5. Weatherproof/Surface Backboxes
6. Circuit Conductors
B. Scope: Provide modification and extension of the existing Notifier fire alarm system to accommodate remodel.
C. In addition, provide design for the following as required in these Contract Documents: Fire Alarm System.
D. In addition, remove existing fire alarm system in remodel areas.
E. System Design:
1. Design Criteria:
a. These are Contractor designed systems. Contact AHJ prior to bid to verify systems' requirements. Design systems in compliance with code as interpreted by the AHJ.
b. Fire Alarm Sequence of Operation: Match Existing.
c. Supervisory Sequence of Operation: Match Existing.
d. Trouble Sequence of Operation: Match Existing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.
B. Division 26, Electrical requirements apply to this section.
1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet the following:
1. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, adopted edition.
2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, adopted edition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 787
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-2
1. Submit shop drawings which include documentation required per NFPA 72; Shop Drawings.
2. In addition, provide the following:
a. Provide system designer NICET certification number or Engineer's signature and seal on shop drawings.
b. Identification of system designer and evidence of qualification or certification of designer as required by AHJ.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Provide manuals containing the documentation required in NFPA 72; Completion Documentation.
2. In addition, provide the following:
a. One year warranty agreement including parts and labor. Warranty period begins upon date of substantial completion.
b. Instruction chart.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements.
B. In addition, meet City of San Carlos, California requirements, ordinances and amendments.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Photoelectric Type Detectors:
1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment.
2. No substitutions permitted.
B. Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors:
1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment.
2. No substitutions permitted.
C. Combination Horn/Strobes:
1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment.
2. Wheelock
3. Or approved equivalent.
D. Strobes:
1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment.
2. Wheelock
3. Or approved equivalent.
E. Weatherproof/Surface Backboxes:
1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm detection devices or notification appliances.
2. Or approved equivalent.
F. Circuit Conductors:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 788
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-3
1. Allied Wire and Cable
2. Belden
3. CCI
4. West Penn Wire
5. Or approved equivalent.
G. Substitutions:
1. For other acceptable manufacturers of specified control units, submit product data showing equivalent features and compliance with Contract Documents.
2. For substitution of products by manufacturers not listed, submit product data showing features and certification by Contractor that the design will comply with contract documents.
H. Equipment to be supplied by a certified manufacturer representative.
2.2 PHOTOELECTRIC TYPE DETECTORS
A. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finished areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted units are acceptable, unless otherwise noted.
B. Panel adjustable sensitivity, LED source, multiple cell, 360 degree smoke entry, visual latching operation indicator, insect screen, functional test switch, two-wire operation and vandal-resistant locking feature.
2.3 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Photoelectric type. Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, visual indication of detector actuation, direct housing mount.
B. Detector powered from control panel, power on indicator light. Detector rated for air velocity, humidity and temperature of duct and environment where installed.
2.4 COMBINATION HORN/STROBES
A. Multi-candela, flush wall and ceiling mount, insect-proof.
B. Provide horn/strobes that meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72, ANSI 117.1 and UL 1971.
Candela rating as required by NFPA 72.
C. Must be compatible with fire alarm control equipment and notification appliance circuit panels.
2.5 STROBES
A. Multi-candela, flush wall and ceiling mount, insect-proof.
B. Provide strobes that meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72, ANSI 117.1 and UL 1971.
Candela rating as required by NFPA 72.
C. Must be compatible with fire alarm control equipment and notification appliance circuit panels.
2.6 CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Copper or optical fiber; color code and label. Type FPL, FPLR and FPLP. Cable type as required by the NEC and the manufacturer.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 789
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-4
B. Minimum signaling line circuit and initiating device circuit wire size: AWG18.
C. Minimum notification appliance circuit wire size: AWG14, or as approved by Engineer.
D. Fiber optic cable as required by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide a complete and operable system compliant with all applicable codes and standards.
B. Obtain Architect's approval of locations of devices, appliances and annunciators before installation.
C. Circuits:
1. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC): Class B
2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B.
D. Spare Capacity:
1. New Notification Appliance Circuits:
a. Minimum 25 percent spare current capacity.
b. Maximum 10 percent voltage drop.
c. Utilize UL maximum current draw value for notification appliances in calculations.
2. New Signaling Line Circuit: Minimum 25 percent spare device capacity.
E. Power Sources:
1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of facility power distribution system.
2. Secondary: Storage batteries.
3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate fire alarm system under normal supervisory condition for 24 hours and operate alarm signals for five minutes at end of standby period.
F. Obtain approval of system design from AHJ prior to installation. Do not begin installation without approval from AHJ and submittal review comments from Engineer.
G. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70 and the Contract Documents.
H. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions, provide wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for the erection of a complete system as described in these specifications, as shown on Drawings and as required by AHJ.
I. Conceal wiring, conduit, boxes and supports where installed in finished areas.
J. Provide raceway system for cabling concealed in walls and hard ceilings and in locations where cabling is exposed. Where exposed, provide surface raceway in finished areas and surface mounted EMT in non-finished areas.
K. Provide cabling and conduits system suitable for wet locations for below grade systems.
L. At junction boxes and termination points, provide identification tags on wires and cables.
M. Route wiring to avoid blocking access to equipment requiring service, access, or adjustment.
N. Existing Components:
1. Existing Fire Alarm System:
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 790
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-5
a. Maintain fully operational during construction in all areas except areas of remodel.
2. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. a. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system. b. Notify local fire service.
c. Make notifications at least five working days in advance. d. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3. Provide fire watch in areas where the system is not functioning if required by the AHJ.
4. Equipment Removal:
a. Remove existing system after acceptance of new fire alarm system. Restore damaged surfaces.
b. Package operational fire alarm and detection equipment that has been removed and offer to Owner prior to disposal.
c. Remove from site and legally dispose of remainder of existing material.
5. On-Premises Supervising Station: Include, as part of this work, modifications necessary to existing supervising station to accommodate new fire alarm work.
O. Fire Safety Systems Interfaces:
1. Fire Safety Functions: Provide power and control conduit, wiring, boxes and terminations to power devices and interface to fire alarm system.
a. Doors:
1) Provide smoke detectors and addressable control relays to release magnetic hold open devices and roll-down fire doors and door locks. Verify requirements and quantities prior to bidding.
2) Smoke Barrier Door Magnetic Holders: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in smoke zone on either side of door.
3) Electronic Locks or Electromagnetic Door Locks on Egress Doors: Unlock smoke zone egress doors upon activation of any alarm initiating device or suppression system in smoke zone.
4) Overhead Coiling Fire Doors: Release upon activation of smoke detectors on either side of door.
b. HVAC Systems:
1) Fire/Smoke Dampers and Smoke Dampers:
(a) Provide required smoke detectors, relays, wiring and the like. (b) Connect control and power wiring to dampers per manufacturer's instructions.
(c) Verify quantities, location and requirements of dampers with Division 23, HVAC Drawings and Specifications and mechanical system installer.
2) Air Moving Systems:
(a) Provide duct-mounted smoke detector for air systems with air flow rates exceeding 2000 CFM. Coordinate with Division 23, HVAC. (b) Install duct-mounted smoke detector(s) on return side of air system. (c) Provide control wiring from addressable relay contacts to air handling equipment controller.
(d) Provide duct-mounted smoke detectors rated for air velocity, temperature and humidity of duct. Verify quantities, locations and requirements with Division 23, HVAC Drawings and mechanical system installer.
(e) Where duct-mounted smoke detectors are mounted in inaccessible building void spaces provide access hatch. Provide access hatch with fire rating equivalent to rating of wall, ceiling, or shaft being penetrated.
P. Inspection and Testing for Completion:
1. System testing and commissioning to be performed by a certified manufacturer representative.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 791
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-6
2. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test.
3. Document audibility measurements and verify intelligibility for each space on record drawings.
4. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction and adjustments.
5. Provide tools, software and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing.
6. Prepare for testing by ensuring that work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required to test system.
7. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents.
8. Notify Owner seven days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests.
9. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.
10. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions. a. Record all system operations and malfunctions.
b. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction. c. Replace devices with readings outside of allowed value at time of system check out.
d. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule training to allow Owner personnel to perform normal duties. e. At end of successful diagnostic period, complete and submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Testing Form."
Q. Closeout:
1. Closeout Demonstration:
a. Demonstrate proper operation of functions to Owner.
b. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests.
c. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration.
d. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration.
e. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by AHJ.
Notify AHJ in time to schedule demonstration.
f. Repeat demonstration until successful.
2. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful and:
a. Specified diagnostic period without malfunction has been completed. b. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. c. Spare parts, extra materials and tools have been delivered. d. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Architect. e. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having jurisdiction.
f. Occupancy permit has been granted.
g. Specified pre-closeout instruction is complete.
3.2 PHOTOELECTRIC TYPE DETECTORS
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Provide machine printed address labels on addressable devices. Labels to be visible from the floor without magnification.
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 792
WRNS Studio
Project No:
SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-7
D. Provide protective guard where device is subject to abuse and where required by AHJ.
3.3 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Provide machine printed address labels on addressable devices. Labels to be visible from the floor without magnification.
3.4 COMBINATION HORN/STROBES
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Provide machine printed labels on notification appliances with appliance circuit number and sequence. Labels to be visible from the floor without magnification.
D. Provide protective guard where device is subject to abuse and where required by AHJ.
3.5 STROBES
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Provide machine printed labels on notification appliances with appliance circuit number and sequence. Labels to be visible from the floor without magnification.
D. Provide protective guard where device is subject to abuse and where required by AHJ.
3.6 WEATHERPROOF/SURFACE BACKBOXES
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Provide manufacturer's weatherproof backbox listed for use in areas where the device or appliance is subject to humidity in excess of listed rating. Provide manufacturer surface backboxes where devices cannot be installed recessed.
3.7 CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.
B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
C. Provide wiring to meet the requirements of national, state and local electrical codes. Provide color coded wiring as recommended and specified by the fire alarm and detection system manufacturer. Provide Type FPLR cable when in a riser application or FPLP cable when installed in plenums.
END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 793
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0010-2
06 1600 Sheathing
06 4023 Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 2100 Building Insulation
07 2715 Nonbituminous self-Adhering Air Barriers
07 5113 Built-Up Asphalt Roofing
07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 8413 Penetration Firestopping
07 9200 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS
08 1416 Flush Wood Doors
08 6250 Tubular Daylighting Devices
08 8000 Glazing
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing
09 2900 Gypsum Board
09 3000 Tiling
09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories
09 6515 Resilient Flooring
09 8430 Sound Absorbing Panels
09 9123 Interior Painting
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 1100 Visual Display Surfaces
10 4413 Fire Protection Cabinets
10 4416 Fire Extinguishers
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
(Not Used)
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
12 2413 Roller Window Shades
12 3600 Countertops
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
(Not Used)
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
(Not Used)
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0000 Fire Suppression Basic Requirements
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 794
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0010-3
21 0500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
21 1300 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 0000 Plumbing Basic Requirements
22 0523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
22 0529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0700 Plumbing Insulation
22 1000 Plumbing Piping
22 3000 Plumbing Equipment
22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 0000 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Basic Requirements 23 0519 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping
23 0523 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping
23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment 23 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equipment 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork and Equipment 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC
23 0700 HVAC Insulation
23 0900 Instrumentation and Control Performance Specifications 23 2113 HVAC Piping
23 2116 Hydronic Piping Specialties
23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 3300 Air Duct Accessories
23 3400 HVAC Fans
23 3600 Air Terminal Units
23 3700 Air Outlets and Inlets
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
(Not Used)
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 0000 Electrical Basic Requirements
26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems and Equipment 26 0533 Raceways
26 0534 Boxes
26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems
26 0810 Building Lighting Acceptance Testing and Documentation 26 0943 Digital Lighting Controls
26 2726 Wiring Devices
26 2816.16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 795
WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0010-4
27 0000 Communications Basic Requirements
27 0528.28 Firestopping for Communications Systems
27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems
27 1500 Communications Horizontal Cabling
DISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 3100 Fire Detection and Alarm
28 0000 Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements 28 0001 Electronic Safety Basic Requirements
28 1000 Access Control and Intrusion Detection
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
(Not Used)
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
(Not Used)
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
(Not Used)
END OF DOCUMENT
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents
8.d
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 796
CITY COUNCIL
STAFF REPORT
MEETING DATE: November 10, 2025
ITEM TITLE: Adopt a Resolution Approving the Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A – Harrington Park Project (C2215) Plans and Specifications; Authorizing a Contract Amendment in the Amount of $300,000 to the WRT, Inc. Agreement for Design Support During Construction; and Authorizing a Call for Bids.
RECOMMENDATION:
Staff recommend that the City Council adopt a Resolution approving the Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A – Harrington Park Project C2215 (“Project”) plans and specifications, authorizing a contract amendment in the amount of $300,000 to the WRT, Inc. agreement, and authorizing a call for bids.
FISCAL IMPLICATIONS:
No additional funding is needed. Staff will return to the City Council for project award and additional funding appropriation.
Funding for the Project comes from C2215 which has an available Project budget of $3,700,000 for construction of Phase 1A and $3,900,000 for Phase 1B.
Harrington Park Construction Cost Rounded Estimate
Design/Engineering Support During Construction (WRT) $300,000 Construction Management Consultant (4Leaf) $550,000
Public Outreach Consultant (WSP) $136,000
Engineer’s Estimate of Construction Cost $5,000,000
TOTAL $5,986,000
Final construction costs will not be known until the City publicly advertises and receives bids from qualified contractors to complete the work. The budget of $3,700,000 for Phase 1A construction did not account for construction cost escalation, design support during construction, construction management, and public outreach. Therefore, additional appropriation or transfer of funds from Phase 1B will be needed when the City Council awards the project for construction in the future.
BACKGROUND:
In 2022, the City began a planning process for the Downtown Specific Plan aimed at enhancing the downtown core. A key component of the Downtown Specific Plan is the Downtown Streetscape Master Plan, which was adopted by the City Council on April 28, 2025. The
8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 797
Downtown Streetscape Master Plan outlines a series of improvements along several downtown streets that focus on placemaking, pedestrians, and sustainability. The Downtown Streetscape Master Plan also outlines key features of the 700 block of Laurel Street and Frank D. Harrington Park (“Harrington Park”) to operate as a pedestrian promenade and central community gathering point.
During the Downtown Streetscape Master Plan process, the City Council expressed an interest to begin implementation and construction within the downtown. Given their prominence, the 700 block of Laurel Street and Harrington Park were identified as Phase 1 implementation projects.
Throughout the several City Council study sessions aimed at refining the designs for Phase 1, the Phase 1 project was divided into two subphases: Phase 1A consisting of the renovation of Harrington Park, and Phase 1B consisting of the entire pedestrianized zone along the 700 block of Laurel Street. The extent of each phase is mapped in Figure 1 below. The project for consideration at this meeting is limited to improvements in Phase 1A (Harrington Park).
Figure 1. Phase 1: Harrington Park and 700 Block of Laurel Site Description
Harrington Park is zoned Park (PK) and is located near the center of the 700 block of Laurel Street. The park’s combined site area is 7,250 square feet and currently includes memorial benches, picnic and chess tables, landscaped areas, mature shade trees, a performance stage, a shade structure, the “Balancing Act” sculpture (commonly referred to as the “Blue Man”), and a series of memorial bricks/pavers. Harrington Park currently serves as both a respite for downtown patrons as well as a flexible event space for nearby activities (including weekly Farmers’ Markets, Harringtunes events, and the Art and Wine Faire).
Project Description
Key features incorporated into the proposed redevelopment of Harrington Park, as guided by the community engagement process, various City Council study sessions, and as set forth in the adopted Downtown Streetscape Master Plan include:
• New paving layout and design (existing memorial bricks/pavers will be retained and relocated in the new paving design layout)
8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 798
• New trees and landscaping
• New public seating arrangement
• New multi-purpose building with restrooms, storage, and utility room • New mass timber pavilion attached to the multi-purpose building • New staging area/multi-purpose curb zone adjacent to the alley Figure 2. Harrington Park Multi-Purpose Building
The Phase 1A design was approved by the City Council on June 9, 2025.
Environmental Determination
The project has been determined to be exempt from the provisions of the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) per sections 15303 and 15304. These sections exempt structures less than 2,500 square feet in floor area and new landscaping, respectively.
ANALYSIS:
The City Engineer signed the final bid set of the plans and specifications on October 31, 2025.
The tentative bid opening is in January 2026, with the Project tentatively scheduled to be awarded in February 2026. Construction is expected to begin in March 2026.
The City’s on-call consultant firm, 4Leaf, Inc. will assist with construction management and inspection for the Project. The subconsultant, WSP, will lead the public outreach and community engagement support before and during construction to minimize construction impacts to the downtown businesses and the community.
8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 799
Staff recommend approving the plans and specifications, authorizing a contract amendment in the amount of $300,000 to the WRT, Inc. agreement, and authorizing a call for bids for the Project.
ALTERNATIVES:
Options available to the City Council include:
1. Adopt a Resolution approving the Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A – Harrington Park Project C2215 plans and specifications; authorizing a contract amendment in the amount of $300,000 to the WRT, Inc. agreement; and authorizing a call for bids; or
2. Do not adopt the Resolution; or
3. Provide staff with alternative direction.
Respectfully submitted by:
Steven Machida, Public Works Director
Approved for submission by:
_______________________
Jeff Maltbie, City Manager
ATTACHMENT(S):
1. Resolution
2. Project Plans
3. Project Specifications
8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 800
RESOLUTION NO. 2025 – ____
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF SAN CARLOS APPROVING THE DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE 1A – HARRINGTON PARK PROJECT (C2215) PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS; AUTHORIZING A CONTRACT AMENDMENT IN THE AMOUNT OF $300,000 TO THE WRT, INC. AGREEMENT FOR DESIGN SUPPORT DURING CONSTRUCTION; AND AUTHORIZING A CALL FOR BIDS.
WHEREAS, in 2022, the City began a planning process for the Downtown Specific Plan aimed at enhancing the downtown core. A key component of the Downtown Specific Plan is the Downtown Streetscape Master Plan, which was adopted by the City Council on April 28, 2025; and
WHEREAS, during the Downtown Streetscape Master Plan process, the City Council expressed an interest to begin implementation and construction within the downtown, starting with Harrington Park, and defined as Phase 1A; and
WHEREAS, key features incorporated into the proposed redevelopment of Harrington Park, as guided by the community engagement process, various City Council Study Sessions, and as set forth in the adopted Downtown Streetscape Master Plan include:
• New paving layout and design (existing memorial bricks/pavers will be retained and relocated in the new paving design layout)
• New trees and landscaping
• New public seating arrangement
• New multi-purpose building with restrooms, storage, and utility room • New mass timber pavilion attached to the multi-purpose building • New staging area/multi-purpose curb zone adjacent to the alley; and WHEREAS, the Phase 1A design was approved by the City Council on June 9, 2025; and WHEREAS, the project has been determined to be exempt from the provisions of the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) per sections 15303 and 15304. These sections exempt structures less than 2,500 square-feet in floor area and new landscaping respectively; and
WHEREAS, the City Engineer signed the final bid set construction documents for the Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A – Harrington Park Project (C2215) (“Project”) on October 31, 2025; and
WHEREAS, staff recommend approving the Project plans and specifications, authorizing a contract amendment in the amount of $300,000 to the WRT, Inc. agreement, and authorizing a call for bids.
8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 801
NOW, THEREFORE BE IT RESOLVED, that the San Carlos City Council approves the Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A – Harrington Park Project C2215 plans and specifications, authorizes a contract amendment in the amount of $300,000 to the WRT, Inc. agreement and authorizes a call for bids.
* * * * *
I, City Clerk Crystal Mui, hereby certify that the foregoing Resolution was duly and regularly passed and adopted by the City Council of the City of San Carlos at a scheduled meeting thereof held on the 10th day of November 2025, by the following vote:
AYES, COUNCILMEMBERS: ___________________________________________ NOES, COUNCILMEMBERS: ___________________________________________ ABSENT, COUNCILMEMBERS: ___________________________________________ ________________________________
CITY CLERK of the City of San Carlos
APPROVED:
___________________________
MAYOR of the City of San Carlos
8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 802
DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE 1A - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION 759 LAUREL STREET, SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET CIVIL ENGINEER CSW|ST2 303 TWIN DOLPHIN DR. REDWOOD CITY, CA 94065 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT I ENGINEER WARE ASSOCIATES, INC. 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401 LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 2670 CAMINO DIABLO WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 785 MARKET ST, STE 800 SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5 SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC. 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 WRTDESIGN.COM WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM STE 100 The City of Good Living CI TY
OF SA
N
CARLOS
CA L I FO
R N I A 10/30/2025 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 6700 KNOLL CENTER PARKWAY. SUITE 300 PLEASANTON, CA 94566 925.621.5300 MECHANICAL I PLUMBING ENGINEER BELDEN CONSULTING ENGINEERS WWW.BELDENINC.COM November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 803
SD SSCO SSCO SSCO SSCO
WV
WM WV
WM WV RELOCATED BLUE MAN SCULPTURE, SCD. SCULPTURE TO FACE CHERRY ST ALLEY
CHERRY ST
OLIVE ST LAUREL ST WALNUT ST EL CAMINO REAL PROJECT SITE DRAWING INDEX + VICINITY MAP C-001 GENERAL NOTES, LEGENDS, & ABBREVIATIONS SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME GENERAL G-000 COVER SHEET G-001 VICINITY MAP, DRAWING INDEX & LEGEND L-111 MATERIALS PLAN DRAWING INDEX L-100 LANDSCAPE KEY PLAN A2-201 RESTROOM ELEVATIONS C-100 SURVEY CONTROL PLAN CIVIL C-101 C-102 L-121 PAVING + SOIL CELL LAYOUT PLANS C-200 C-300 C-301 UTILITY PLAN & PROFILE A2-008 RESTROOM ADA CODE COMPLIANCE A2-101 FACILITIES BUILDING GROUND FLOOR PLAN A2-102 A2-103 FACILITIES BUILDING ROOF PLAN FACILITIES BUILDING REFLECTED CEILING PLAN L-131 LAYOUT PLAN ARCHITECTURE A0-101 SITE KEY PLAN A2-004 FACILITIES BUILDING CA GREEN BUILDING STANDARDS A0-000 ARCHITECTURAL COVER SHEET AND GENERAL NOTES A2-005 FACILITIES BUILDING CA GREEN BUILDING STANDARDS A2-002 RESTROOM RENDERINGS A2-003 FACILITIES BUILDING CODE COMPLIANCE A2-007 A2-006 EL001 LIGHTING PLAN LIGHTING MECHANICAL P0.3 PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS M2.0 MECHANICAL FLOOR AND ROOF PLAN P2.0 PLUMBING PLANS PLUMBING P0.1 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS P0.2 PLUMBING SCHEDULES P3.0 PLUMBING DETAILS M0.2 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M0.1 GENERAL NOTES, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS SURVEY CONTROL ENLARGEMENT HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN GRADING ENLARGEMENT C-400 C-500 STORMWATER CONTROL PLAN C-600 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-601 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-602 DETAILS & SECTIONS L-501 SITE DETAILS - PAVING N/A N/A L-502 SITE DETAILS - PAVING L-503 SITE DETAILS - FURNISHING L-504 SITE DETAILS - CUSTOM BENCHES L-505 SITE DETAILS - CUSTOM BENCHES L-601 SITE DETAILS - PLANTING AUDIOVISUAL TA-401 AUDIO SYSTEM ENLARGED PLANS TA-151 AUDIO SYSTEM REFLECTED CEILING PLAN TA-501 AUDIO SYSTEM DETAILS TA-502 AUDIO SYSTEM DETAILS TA-601 AUDIO SYSTEM CONDUIT RISER TA-101 AUDIO SYSTEM OVERALL PLAN TA-000 ELECTRICAL FOR AUDIO SYSTEM NOTES AND LEGENDS IRRIGATION DESIGN LI-103 IRRIGATION DETAILS LI-102 IRRIGATION DETAILS LI-104 IRRIGATION DETAILS LI-101 IRRIGATION PLAN - HARRINGTON PARK LI-100 IRRIGATION NOTES AND LEGEND P3.1 PLUMBING DETAILS LANDSCAPE VICINITY MAP (NTS) A2-802 FACILITIES BUILDING SCHEDULES A2-402 RESTROOM ENTRY INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A2-403 MECHANICAL ROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A2-404 A2-801 STORAGE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FACILITIES BUILDING DOOR & WINDOW SCHEDULES A2-301 FACILITIES BUILDING SECTIONS A2-401 RESTROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A2-302 FACILITIES BUILDING WALL SECTIONS A2-901 FACILITIES BUILDING FOUNDATION & WATERPROOFING DETAILS A2-902 FACILITIES BUILDING ENVELOPE AND TYPICAL DETAILS STRUCTURAL S2-000 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES S2-501 RESTROOM CONCRETE TYPICAL DETAILS S0-000 COVER SHEET & INDEX S2-101 RESTROOM AND STORAGE FOUNDATION PLAN S2-102 RESTROOM AND STORAGE ROOF PLAN S2-201 RESTROOM AND STORAGE ELEVATION & DETAILS S2-503 RESTROOM AND STORAGE DETAILS S3-101 SITE LANDSCAPE ELEMENTS SITE PLAN S2-502 RESTROOM FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE DETAILS S2-504 RESTROOM TYPICAL FRAMING DETAILS S2-505 RESTROOM ROOF DETAILS S3-000 SITE FOUNDATIONS STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES PROJECT BOUNDARY The City of Good Living CI TY OF SAN CARLOS CA L I FOR N I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSW|ST2 303 TWIN DOLPHIN DR., REDWOOD CITY, CA 94065 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT I ENGINEER WARE ASSOCIATES, INC. 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 8976.01 - DOWNTOWN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE 1A - 700 LAUREL ST AND HARRINGTON PARK DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 12345 6 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 LI FO R N I A O F C E S T A T 4251AK . S E MA J S T Y E L K I CSIGNATURE DATE R EG I ST E R E D LA N DS C A P E A RC H I T EC T E X P . 1 1 - 3 0 - 2 5 09-10-2025 L-141 PLANTING PLAN L-000 GENERAL LANDSCAPE NOTES ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN & GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM, DETAILS, LIGHT FIXTURE & PANELBOARD SCHEDULE POWER AND LIGHTING PLAN - FACILITIES BLDG. OVERALL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN PARTIAL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN ELECTRICAL DETAILS CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMPLIANCE TITLE 24 (INDOOR) SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES, CODES & SHEET INDEX ELECTRICAL DETAILS A2-904 FACILITIES BUILDING OPENINGS DETAIL A2-905 FACILITIES BUILDING ROOF DETAILS A2-906 FACILITIES BUILDING DETAILS FACILITIES BUILDING CA GREEN BUILDING STANDARDS FACILITIES BUILDING CA GREEN BUILDING STANDARDS ST410 FOUNDATIONS, CONCRETE DETAILS STRUCTURE CRAFT ST002 ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS AND DRAWING LIST ST101 LOAD MAPS ST001 COVER SHEET ST201 COLUMN AND ROOF PLAN ST003 GENERAL NOTES ST004 GENERAL NOTES ST401 ST301 ELEVATION, 3D DETAILS E101 E301 E002 E401 E201 E202 E602 E601 E001 LI-105 IRRIGATION DETAILS C-603 DETAILS & SECTIONS EXISTING CONDITION AND DEMOLITION P2.1 PLUMBING ROOF PLAN A2-009 FACILITIES BUILDING ADA CODE COMPLIANCE ST005 GENERAL NOTES M3.0 MECHANICAL DETAILS S3-502 SITE LANDSCAPE FOUNDATION AND CONCRETE DETAILS S3-501 SITE LANDSCAPE CONCRETE TYPICAL DETAILS A2-001 FACILITIES BUILDING MATERIAL BOARD HAUL MAP (NTS) C-604 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-700 EROSION CONTROL PLAN C-701 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTISES GENERAL NOTES 1. ELEVATIONS AND LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING UTILITY CROSSINGS SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO START OF ANY CONSTRUCTION AFFECTING SAID LINES. CONTACT USA AT (800) 642-2444 AT LEAST TWO WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO EXCAVATION. 2. ALL APPLICABLE WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CITY OF SAN CARLOS STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS, PREPARED IN THE OFFICE OF ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING MODIFICATIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL RESTORE ALL DAMAGED, REMOVED OR OTHERWISE DISTURBED WALLS, FENCES, SERVICES, UTILITIES, IMPROVEMENTS OR FEATURES OF WHATEVER NATURE, DUE TO CONTRACTOR'S WORK. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THEIR WORK WITH THE INSTALLATION OF FACILITIES BY PG&E, AT&T, AND CABLE TV INSTALLATION. VALVE BOXES AND MANHOLES, AND STRUCTURES TO BE SET TO GRADE IN CONCRETE AFTER PAVING. 5. ALL STREET MONUMENTS AND OTHER PERMANENT MONUMENTS DISTURBED DURING THE PROCESS OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE REPLACED BEFORE ACCEPTANCE OF THE IMPROVEMENTS BY THE CITY ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE THE CITY ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE TWO WORKING DAYS ADVANCE NOTICE FOR INSPECTION. 7. NO TREES 9" DIAMETER OR LARGER MEASURED 54" ABOVE GRADE, SHALL BE REMOVED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE CITY ENGINEER. TREE REMOVALS, IF NECESSARY, SHALL CONFORM TO THE HERITAGE TREE ORDINANCE, ORDINANCE. NO. 1580. 8. FOR LANE CLOSURES, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE A TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN AND OBTAIN APPROVAL OF THE CITY ENGINEER BEFORE COMMENCING WORK. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE FLAGMEN, CONES OR BARRICADES, AS NECESSARY TO CONTROL TRAFFIC AND PREVENT HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS PER THE CALIFORNIA STANDAD PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND MANUAL ON TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES, LATEST EDITION. 9. PEDESTRIAN, PUBLIC ACCESSES, WHEELCHAIR ACCESSES SHALL BE MAINTAINED DURING THE CONSTRUCTION TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE CITY ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 10. NO TRENCHES OR HOLES SHALL BE LEFT OPEN OVERNIGHT; USE STEEL PLATING OR HOT-MIX ASPHALT AS REQUIRED TO PROTECT OPEN TRENCHES OVERNIGHT. 11. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTROL DUST AT ALL TIMES AND SWEEP STREETS AS OFTEN AS NECESSARY DURING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED BY THE CITY ENGINEER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 12. ALL REVISIONS TO THIS PLAN MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE CITY ENGINEER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL BE ACCURATELY SHOWN ON REVISED PLANS STAMPED AND SIGNED BY CITY ENGINEER PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE IMPROVEMENTS. 13. ALL CONSTRUCTION STAKING FOR CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK, SANITARY SEWERS, STORM DRAINS, WATER LINES, FIRE HYDRANTS, ELECTROLIERS, ETC., SHALL BE DONE BY A CALIFORNIA REGISTERED CIVIL ENGINEER OR CALIFORNIA LICENSED LAND SURVEYOR. GENERAL PROJECT SCOPE: PHASE 1A INCLUDES THE IMPROVEMENTS TO HARRINGTON PARK. A NEW FACILITIES BUILDING, WHICH INCLUDES A RESTROOM, STORAGE, AND WATER FEATURE PUMP ROOM. A WOOD CANOPY ON THE RESTROOM MATCHES A PAVILION THAT WILL BE BUILT AS PART OF PHASE 1B. NEW LANDSCAPE PAVING, PLANTING, AND SITE FURNISHINGS ARE DESIGNED IN THE PARK, ALONG WITH SITE UTILITIES. C-605 DETAILS & SECTIONS L-506 SITE DETAILS - CUSTOM BENCHES L-507 SITE DETAILS - EXISTING FURNISHING A0-102 SITE EGRESS & ACCESSIBLE PATH OF TRAVEL PLAN A2-903 FACILITIES BUILDING DETAILS A2-803 FACILITIES BUILDING WATERPROOFING SCHEDULES G-002 ACCESSIBILITY MAP M4.1 TITLE 24 FORMS M4.0 TITLE 24 FORMS M4.2 TITLE 24 FORMS P4.0 TITLE 24 CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMPLIANCE TITLE 24 (POWER E004 DISTRIBUTION) E003 CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMPLIANCE TITLE 24 (OUTDOOR) TA-602 AUDIO SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM G-001 November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 804
SD
WM WM ALLEY LAUREL ST DETECTABLE WARNING CURB RAMP 48" WIDE ACCESSIBLE PATH, 2% MAX SLOPE IN ALL DIRECTIONS ADA ACCESSIBLE ROUTE The City of Good Living CI TY OF SAN CARLOS CA L I FOR N I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSW|ST2 303 TWIN DOLPHIN DR., REDWOOD CITY, CA 94065 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT I ENGINEER WARE ASSOCIATES, INC. 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 8976.01 - DOWNTOWN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE 1A - 700 LAUREL ST AND HARRINGTON PARK DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 12345 6 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 LI FO R N I A O F C E S T A T 4251AK . S E MA J S T Y E L K I CSIGNATURE DATE R EG I ST E R E D LA N DS C A P E A RC H I T EC T E X P . 1 1 - 3 0 - 2 5 09-10-2025 N G-002 ACCESSIBILITY MAP NOTES 1. SEE SHEET A0-102 FOR ARCHITECTURAL PLAN FOR SITE EGRESS AND ACCESSIBLE PATH OF TRAVEL. JS OX/MD 1 SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" ACCESSIBILITY MAP 0 5'-4" 10'-8" 21'-4" SCALE: 3/32" = 1'-0" G-002 November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 805
The City of Good
Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 ABBREVIATIONS A.B. AGGREGATE BASE A.C. ASPHALT CONCRETE BFP BACKFLOW PREVENTOR BC BOTTOM OF CURB C CLASS, CIVIL CB CATCH BASIN CL CENTERLINE , CONTROL LINE CLR CLEARANCE DI DROP INLET DIA DIAMETER DWY DRIVEWAY E EAST EG EXISTING GRADE EL ELEVATION EX EXISTING E.W. EACH WAY FC FACE OF CURB FF FINISH FLOOR FG FINISH GRADE FH FIRE HYDRANT FL FLOWLINE FS FINISH SURFACE GB GRADE BREAK HORZ HORIZONTAL INV INVERT IRR IRRIGATION JP JOINT POLE JT JOINT TRENCH L LENGTH/LEFT LF LINEAR FEET MAX MAXIMUM MH MANHOLE MIN MINIMUM N NORTH NO NUMBER NTS NOT TO SCALE O.C. ON CENTER OFF OFFSET PERF PERFORATED PL PROPERTY LINE POC POINT OF CONNECTION PRO PROPOSED PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE R RADIUS/RIGHT R.C. RECOMPACT RW RIGHT OF WAY S SOUTH, SLOPE S.A.D SEE ARCHITECTURE DRAWING SD STORM DRAIN SDI STORM DRAIN INLET SDMH STORM DRAIN MANHOLE SL STREET LIGHT SS SANITARY SEWER SDR STANDARD DIMENSION RATIO SQ SQUARE SSCO SANITARY SEWER CLEANOUT SSMH SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE ST STREET STA STATION STD STANDARD t THICKNESS TC TOP OF CURB TI TRAFFIC INDEX TYP TYPICAL VERT VERTICAL VIF VERIFY IN FIELD W WATER, WEST WM WATER METER WP WORK POINT WV WATER VALVE BASIS OF TOPOGRAPHY THE TOPOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SHOWN IS BASED ON A FIELD SURVEY DONE BY CSWST2 IN JULY AND AUGUST OF 2024. BENCHMARK THE VERTICAL DATUM IS NORTH AMERICAN DATUM OF 1988 (NAVD88), PER 2010.00 (2011), ZONE 3, PER OPUS USING STATIC GPS EQUIPMENT BASIS OF BEARINGS THE HORIZONTAL DATUM IS NORTH AMERICAN DATUM OF 1983 (NAD 83) PER 2010.00 (2011), ZONE 3, PER OPUS USING STATIC GPS EQUIPMENT. SYMBOLS EXISTING PROPOSED SIGN LIGHT - POST MOUNTED JOINT POLE (WITH GUY) SANITARY SEWER - CLEANOUT SANITARY SEWER - MANHOLE STORM DRAINAGE - AREA DRAIN STORM DRAINAGE - INLET STORM DRAINAGE - MANHOLE GAS VALVE FIRE HYDRANT WATER METER WATER VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTOR SSCO SDWMWV DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE BIORETENTION AREA PLANTER/ LANDSCAPE CONCRETE CURB EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION RETAINING CURB AT BIORETENTION (ADJACENT TO PROPERTY LINE) VEHICULAR CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN CONCRETE LEGEND PROPOSED GENERAL NOTES LEGEND & ABBEREVIATIONS C-001 X" X" X" X" GB LINETYPES EXISTING PROPOSED BLDG. ENVELOPE CENTERLINE COMMUNICATION CONTOUR - MAJOR CONTOUR - MINOR EASEMENT ELECTRICAL LINE FACE OF CUB BACK OF CURB GAS LINE GRADE BREAK IRRIGATION OVERHEAD UTILITY PIPE SIZE CALLOUTS PERFORATED PIPES PROPERTY / LOT LINE RIGHT OF WAY SANITARY SEWER SANITARY SEWER - LATERAL STORM DRAIN STREET LIGHT TRENCH DRAIN WATER WATER LATERAL 30 SS SS-LAT W CIVIL SHEET INDEX SHEET NO. SHEET TITLE C-001 GENERAL NOTES LEGEND & ABBEREVIATIONS C-100 SURVEY CONTROL PLAN C-101 SURVEY CONTROL ENLARGEMENT C-102 EXISTING CONDITION AND DEMOLITION C-200 HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN C-300 GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN C-301 GRADING ENLARGEMENT C-400 UTILITY PLAN & PROFILE C-500 STORMWATER CONTROL PLAN C-600 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-601 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-602 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-603 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-604 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-605 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-700 EROSION CONTROL PLAN C-701 BEST MANAGEMNET PRACTISES C November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 806
MON_1
MON_3
MON_4
MON_5
MON_6 MON_7
MON_8 MON_9
MON_11 MON_10
MON_12
MON_13
MON_14
MON_15
MON_18 MON_17 MON_16 WALNUT STREET WALNUT STREET (60' ROW[2]) WALNUT STREET (60' ROW[2]) LAUREL STREET (60' ROW[2]) LAUREL STREET (60' ROW[2]) LAUREL STREET (60' ROW[2])
EL CAMINO REAL (VARIABLE ROW)
SAN CARLOS AVENUE (100' ROW)
CHERRY STREET (50' ROW[2])
OLIVE STREET (50' ROW[2])
ARROYO AVENUE (50' ROW[4])
ARROYO AVENUE (50' ROW[2])
EL CAMINO REAL (VARIABLE ROW) EL CAMINO REAL (VARIABLE ROW) REF.[23] BLOCK 16 8 M 25-26[2] BLOCK 17 8 M 25-26[2] BLOCK 24 8 M 25-26[2] 74 PM 5-7[15]
140 M 87-93[25]
REF.[27] BLOCK 15 8 M 25-26[2] BLOCK 13 8 M 25-26[2] BLOCK 12 8 M 25-26[2] BLOCK 11 8 M 25-26[2] BLOCK 25 8 M 25-26[2] REF.[8] REF.[7] BLOCK 26 8 M 25-26[2] 18 M 68-69[4]
REF.[26] REF.[20]
REF.[3]
REF.[5]
REF.[16] TIE IN LINE (L1) 1+00 2+00 3+00 4+00 5+00 6+00 7+00 8+00 9+00 10+00 11+00 12+00 13+00 14+00 15+00 16+00 17+00 18+00 19+00 20+00 20+86 2+95 0+75 1+00 2+00
Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 80 ft. 80 160 80 The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 SCALE: = PLAN VIEW 1" 80' MONUMENT DESCRIPTION AND COORDINATES # DESCRIPTION NORTH EAST MAP REFERENCES LEGEND NOTES SURVEY CONTROL PLAN C-100 HARRINGTON PARK ENLARGEMENT, SEE SHEET C-101 HARRINGTON PARK ALIGNMENT STA 1+00 LAUREL STREET ALIGNMENT STA 11+55.19 November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 807
LAUREL STREET (60' ROW[2]) 11+00 12+00 HARRINGTON PARK ALIGNMENT STA 1+00 LAUREL STREET ALIGNMENT STA 11+55.19 LAUREL STREET 749 LAUREL ST. 759 LAUREL ST. 759 LAUREL ST. 765 LAUREL ST.
N47° 26' 14.30"E 145.000'
N47° 28' 54.87"E 145.000'
N47° 26' 14.30"E 145.000' 24.913' 25.100' 25.025' 24.987' 2+95 1+00 2+00 HARRINGTON PARK Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 10 ft. 10 10 20 The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 SCALE: = PLAN VIEW 1" 10' LEGEND NOTES SURVEY CONTROL ENLARGEMENT C-101 November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 808
HARRINGTON PARK 765 LAUREL ST. 749 LAUREL ST.
LAUREL STREET EX. IRRIGATION BFP (TO BE REMOVED) EX FIRE HYDRANT (TO BE RELOCATED) EX. SD (TYPICAL) (TO BE REMOVED) EX. SDI (TYPICAL) (TO BE REMOVED) EX. SDI(TYPICAL) (TO BE REMOVED) EX. STAGE AREA (INCLUDING FOUNDATION, PILLARS, AND SHED) (TO BE REMOVED) EX. PEDESTAL PLAQUE (TO BE SALVAGED AND REINSTALLED PER LANDSCAPE PLANS ) EX.STREET LIGHT (TO BE REMOVED) EX.ELECTRIC BOX (TO BE REMOVED) EX. WATER METER (TO BE RELOCATED) EX.STREET LIGHT (TO BE REMOVED) EX. CONCRETE WALKWAY (TO BE REMOVED) EX. ELECTRIC LINE (TO BE REMOVED) EX.TREE (TO BE REMOVED) (TYP) EX. GAS CAP (PROTECT IN PLACE) EX.STREET LIGHT (TO BE REMOVED) EX. UTILITY BOX (TO BE REMOVED) EX. ELECTRIC BOX (TO BE REMOVED) EX. ELECTRIC BOX (TO BE REMOVED) EX. WATER VALVE (TO BE REMOVED) EX. UTILITY BOX (TO BE REMOVED) EX. IRRIGATION METER (TO BE RELOCATED) EX.SIGN POST (TO BE REMOVED) LIMIT OF WORK (TYP) EX. WATER FOUNTAIN (TO BE REMOVED) EX. WATER VALVE (TO BE REMOVED) EX. WATER VALVE (TO BE REMOVED) EX. IRRIGATION LINE (TO BE REMOVED) EX. WATER METER (PROTECT IN PLACE) EX. IRRIGATION CAP (TO BE REMOVED) EX. ELECTRICAL LINE (TO BE REMOVED) SALVAGE EX. BRICK PAVERS SEE NOTE 8 (SEE LANDSCAPE PLANS FOR RE-INSTALLMENT) PROTECT EX. UTILITIES IN PLACE CONTRACTOR TO SALVAGE
AND REINSTALL THE WOOD
DINING AREA. SEE NOTE 5.
REMOVE EX. CONCRETE AT
NEAREST CONTROL JOINT
EX. CURB (TYPICAL)
(TO BE REMOVED)
APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF
"BLUE MAN" SCULPTURE, SEE NOTE 1
PROTECT ALL EXISTING UTILITIES
IN PLACE WHICH ARE NOT
BEING MODIFIED OR REMOVED.
PROTECT ALL EXISTING UTILITIES
IN PLACE WHICH ARE NOT
BEING MODIFIED OR REMOVED.
PROTECT ALL EXISTING UTILITIES
IN PLACE WHICH ARE NOT
BEING MODIFIED OR REMOVED.
SALVAGE EX. BRICK PAVERS SEE NOTE 8 (SEE LANDSCAPE PLANSFOR RE-INSTALLMENT) EX. SIGN (TO BE SALVAGED AND REINSTALLED PER LANDSCAPE PLANS ) EX. PAVEMENT TYPE TO BE SALVAGED AND REINSTALLED CONFORMING
THE ADJACENT PAVEMENT
Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 10 ft. 10 20 10 The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 EXISTING CONDITION AND DEMOLITION C-102 LEGENDREMOVE TREE UTILITY LINE TO BE REMOVED CONCRETE TO BE SAWCUT AND REMOVED SALVAGE EX. BRICKS AND REPORT TO CITY INSPECTOR LIMIT OF WORK SAW CUT NOTES: 1. THE EXISTING "BLUE MAN" SCULPTURE, INCLUDING ITS FOUNDATION, SHALL BE SALVAGED AND RELOCATED TO THE NEW LOCATION INDICATED ON "C200, HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN" THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SAWCUT THE EXISTING FOUNDATION AROUND ITS PERIMETER, LIFT THE SCULPTURE AND FOUNDATION AS A SINGLE UNIT, AND REINSTALL IT AT THE DESIGNATED LOCATION WITHOUT CAUSING DAMAGE TO THE ARTWORK OR BASE. ALL HANDLING, TRANSPORT, AND REINSTALLATION PROCEDURES SHALL BE PERFORMED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF THE CITY REPRESENTATIVE TO ENSURE PRESERVATION OF THE SCULPTURE AND ITS INTEGRITY. 2. ALL THE EXISTING TABLES, BENCHES, AND CHESS TABLES WITHIN THE LIMIT OF WORK SHALL BE CAREFULLY SALVAGED AND DELIVERED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO THE CITY OF SAN CARLOS CORPORATION YARD AS DIRECTED BY CITY STAFF. COORDINATE WITH CITY MAINTENANCE STAFF REGARDING DELIVERY LOCATION, TIMING, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO REMOVAL. ALL ITEMS SHALL BE REMOVED WITHOUT DAMAGE AND VERIFIED DELIVERED BEFORE STARTING ANY DEMOLITION OR SITE WORK. 3. ADDITIONAL EXISTING UTILITIES MAY BE PRESENT WITHIN LIMIT OF WORK BEYOND THOSE SHOWN ON THE DEMOLITION PLANS. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE PLANS, CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL EXISTING UTILITIES AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WATER VALVES, AREA DRAINS, STORM DRAIN INLETS, CONDUITS, METER BOXES, AND UTILITY BOXES, AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW CONSTRUCTION. ALL REMOVAL AND RESTORATION WORK SHALL CONFORM TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 024100 – DEMOLITION. 4. ADDITIONAL EXISTING UTILITY POLES, TREES, AND LANDSCAPE ELEMENTS BEYOND THOSE SHOWN ON THE DEMOLITION PLANS WITHIN LIMIT OF WORK MAY BE PRESENT. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE PLANS, CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL EXISTING UTILITY POLES, TREE ROOTS, PLANTERS, SHRUBS, AND LANDSCAPE FEATURES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW CONSTRUCTION. ALL REMOVAL AND RESTORATION WORK SHALL CONFORM TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 024100 – DEMOLITION AND SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING 5. THE EXISTING OUTDOOR DINING PATIO SHALL BE CAREFULLY DISMANTLED AND TEMPORARILY REMOVED TO ALLOW CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. ALL COMPONENTS SHALL BE SALVAGED, PROTECTED, AND STORED IN A SECURE LOCATION FOR REINSTALLATION AFTER CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION WITH THE CITY OF SAN CARLOS AND THE PROPERTY OWNER TO ENSURE THE STRUCTURE IS REINSTALLED IN ITS ORIGINAL LOCATION AND CONDITION. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 024100 – DEMOLITION AND SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING. 6. ALL EXISTING SITE FURNISHINGS, LIGHTING, SIGNAGE, AND HARDSCAPE ELEMENTS SHOWN OR ENCOUNTERED WITHIN THE LIMITS OF WORK SHALL BE REMOVED AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW CONSTRUCTION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE PLANS. ITEMS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO KIOSKS, PARK SIGNS, LIGHT POLES, PAVERS, CURBS, ASPHALT, STRIPING, AND BIKE RACKS SHALL BE CAREFULLY REMOVED AND EITHER SALVAGED FOR REINSTALLATION OR DISPOSED PER SPECIFICATIONS. ALL REMOVAL AND RESTORATION WORK SHALL CONFORM TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 024100 – DEMOLITION AND SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY REMOVE, PROTECT, AND ALL EXISTING SIGNS AND POSTS DISTURBED DURING CONSTRUCTION WITHIN THE PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY. ALL SIGNS AND POSTS SHALL BE SALVAGED IN GOOD CONDITION AND REINSTALLED PER PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ANY DAMAGED OR MISSING COMPONENTS SHALL BE REPLACED IN KIND AT THE CONTRACTOR’S EXPENSE. 8. CONTRACTOR SHALL DOCUMENT ORDER AND PLACEMENT OF THE EXISTING BRICK PAVERS TO BE SALVAGED. DOCUMENTATION SHALL INCLUDE PHOTOGRAPHS AND SKETCHES OF THE EXISTING INSTALLATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WITH ELECTRONIC COPIES OF PHOTOGRAPHS AND SKETCHES OF THE PAVER LOCATIONS IN READABLE FORMATS. PLACEMENT OF DONOR BRICKS SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE PARKS AND RECREATION DIRECTOR. THE SALVAGED BRICKS SHALL BE REINSTALLED IN THE SAME ORDER. 9. UTILITY SERVICES TO FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED OR DEMOLISHED SHALL BE DISCONNECTED, CUT, AND CAPPED WITH REQUIREMENTS OF THE RESPECTIVE UTILITY AGENCY. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ABANDONED SURFACE STRUCTURES AND ACCESSORIES BUT NOT LIMITED TO VALVES, BOXES, CONDUIT ENDS, OR PULL BOXES, AND SHALL FIELD VERIFY AND CONFIRM LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION OR DISCONNECTION WORK.
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 809
HARRINGTON PARK
LAUREL STREET 765 LAUREL ST. 749 LAUREL ST. 20' PL-PL EX. ALLEY WORK POINT (WP) IS AT GRIDLINE A AND 1, S.A.D 1F.O.C. 2F.O.C.
F.O.C. A
F.O.C. B
F.O.C. C
F.O.C. DE ℄COL. 1F.O.C. 2F.O.C. 16.56' PL-WP
1.1875'
PL-WP REFRENCE POINT GRIDLINE D AND 1, S.A.D.
TIE-IN
TIE-IN TIE-IN STA:1+30.02 OFF:25.10'R STA:1+29.98 OFF:24.91'L STA:2+75.01 OFF:24.99'R STA:2+74.98 OFF:25.03'L STA:1+30.00 OFF:0.00' STA:1+35.15 OFF:24.96'R STA:2+24.38 OFF:24.50'R STA:2+66.46 OFF:16.43'R STA:2+65.00 OFF:2.12'L STA:2+74.99 OFF:0.00' STA:2+65.01 OFF:12.79'R STA:2+65.00 OFF:2.79'R CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE SIDEWALK, CURB, AND GUTTER TO PREVIOUS CONDITION PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 6 "STD. CURB & GUTTER A.C. BERMS & SIDEWALK." CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE VALLEY GUTTER TO PREVIOUS CONDITION PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 8 "CONCRETE VALLEY GUTTER." PEDESTRIAN CONCRETE VEHICULAR CONCRETE PAVEMENT STA:1+38.06 OFF:21.32'R STA:1+44.33 OFF:17.70'R STA:2+21.38 OFF:20.76'R STA:2+16.53 OFF:17.50'R STA:1+96.66 OFF:11.38'R STA:1+87.87 OFF:11.02'R STA:1+58.29 OFF:16.07'R EXTENDED CURB AT PROPERTY LINE STA:1+35.55 OFF:0.00' STA:2+24.38 OFF:0.00' STA:2+16.59 OFF:0.00' CAMERA 3 SEE SPECIFICATIONS CAMERA 1 SEE SPECIFICATIONS CAMERA 2 SEE SPECIFICATIONS CAMERA 4 SEE SPECIFICATIONS STA:2+58.44 OFF:0.00' STA:2+64.99 OFF:12.95'L PROVIDE BLOCKOUT IN LIGHT WALL FOUNDATION NEAR LIGHT POLE, 6" CLEARANCE ON EITHER SIDE OF POLE BASE BOLLARDS, SEE LANDSCAPE PLANS C-602 4 C-602 5 C-601 4 S42° 31' 05.13"E 24.500'
S42° 31' 05.13"E 24.464' N42° 31' 05.13"W 23.792' S42° 33' 45.71"E 23.825' N3° 49' 47.26"W 4.022' L3L2 C2 L4 C3 L9 L6 C5 L8 L1
Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 10 ft. 10 20 10 CHERRY ST.
LAUREL ST. 2.66'
2.66'
701-705 LAUREL ST.
N47° 26' 14.30"E 15.445' TIE-IN STA: 8+20.50 INSTALL SALVAGED BLUE MAN STA: 8+23.15 SCULPTURE, SEE DETAIL 3, SHEET C-603 Curve Table Curve # C1 C2 C3 C5 Length 7.42 8.56 8.78 5.93 Radius 9.92 18.82 20.00 9.64 Delta 42.82 26.08 25.15 35.26 Chord Direction S17° 29' 34"W S50° 50' 38"W N51° 20' 01"E N81° 24' 28"E Chord Length 7.24 8.49 8.71 5.84 Parcel Line Table Line # L2L3L4L6L8L9 Length 44.04 0.75 29.67 4.07 4.39 20.83 Direction N38° 45' 25.39"E N51° 14' 35.65"W S38° 45' 25.39"W S53° 17' 25.30"W N81° 15' 01.35"W N63° 54' 36.05"E The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN C-200 C-602 6 CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE A.C. PAVEMENT TO PREVIOUS CONDITION CONTRACTOR TO REPLACE CENTERLINE STRIPING PER CALTRANS STD. DETAIL A20A CONTRACTOR TO REPLACE PARKING STALL STRIPING WITH 4" WHITE PAINT NOTE: FOR GRIDLINE INFORMATION, SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE A.C. C-602 PAVEMENT TO PREVIOUS CONDITION 6 CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE A.C. C-602 PAVEMENT TO PREVIOUS CONDITION 6 DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE BIORETENTION AREA PLANTER/ LANDSCAPE CONCRETE CURB EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION RETAINING CURB AT BIORETENTION (ADJACENT TO PROPERTY LINE) VEHICULAR CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN CONCRETE CAMERA LEGEND PROPOSED November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 810
SD
12"SD
12"SD
30 12"SD 765 LAUREL ST. 749 LAUREL ST. C-601 5 C-604 A
C-604 B
C-604 C
6"SD 1.9% 0.2% PROPOSED 50± LF TRENCH DRAIN, SEE DETAIL 6 SHEET C-601 EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION SEE DETAIL 1, SHEET C-602 12" INV: 27.00 PROPOSED 49 LF PVC C900 CLASS 150 12" SD @ S=0.47% INSTALL SD INLET PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 23, "STD. DROP INLET TYPE 1" AND CONNECT TO EX. 12" SD. RIM: 29.43 EX. INV: 26.40 (VIF) EX. SD INLET. RIM: 29.60 INV: 26.68 EX. SD INLET. RIM: 29.20 INV: 26.77± PROPOSED 28 LF PVC C900 CLASS 150 12" SD @S=1.4% PROPOSED 33LF 6"SD PIPE POC FOR SILVA CELLS SUBDRAIN INV: 27.14 SEE DETAIL 2, SHEET C-603 AREA DRAIN GRATE: 27.88 INV: 26.71 AREA DRAIN GRATE: 27.88 INV: 26.63 AREA DRAIN GRATE: 29.98 INV: 27.35 AREA DRAIN GRATE: 29.50 INV: 27.21 AREA DRAIN GRATE: 28.99 INV: 27.35 INSTALL 24" SDMH PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 11 "STD. MANHOLE," DETAIL NO. 12 "STD. CONNECTION TO MANHOLE WALLS," AND DETAIL NO. 14 "STD. MANHOLE COVER AND FRAME." CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL (1) ONE WAY CHECK VALVE OR FLAT GATE ON THE NORTH SIDE PIPE INLET RIM :29.97 INV: 26.59 PROPOSED 8LF 4"SD PIPE POC FOR SILVA CELLS SUBDRAIN INV: 27.14 SEE DETAIL 2, SHEET C-603 PROPOSED 44LF 4"SD PERF PIPE FOR SILVA CELLS PROPOSED 61 LF 4"SD PERF PIPE FOR SILVA CELLS PROPOSED 16LF 4"SD PIPE 6"SD BIORETENTION AREA FS 26.50 CONFORM TO EX. GRADE FS 30.01 EG 30.01 CONFORM TO EX. GRADE FS 30.62 EG 30.62 FS 28.56 FS 28.95 FS 28.93 CONFORM TO EX. GRADE FS 30.30 EG 30.30 FS 29.22 FS 29.25 FS 28.70 TC 28.87 FS 28.37 TC 28.82 FS 28.32 GB GB FS 28.97 SEE ENLARGEMENT ON SHEET C-301 SEE ENLARGEMENT ON SHEET C-301 GB GB
GB CONFORM TO EX. GRADE FS 27.13 EG 27.13CONFORM TO EX. GRADE FS 27.60 EG 27.60 FS 28.22 FS 28.24 35 LF 4" SD PIPE FS 30.44 28 LF 4" SD PIPE 14 LF 4" SD PIPE 27 LF 4" SD PIPE TC 29.57 FS 29.07 EG 29.05 TC 29.25 FS 28.75 EG 30.20 GB
GB
GB GB GB
GB
43 LF 6" SD PIPE
15 LF 6" SD PIPE FF 28.72 FF 28.32 FF 29.17
LAUREL STREET HARRINGTON PARK FF 26.39
0.9%8.1%
0.3% 0.2%
0.7%
9.7%
1.4% 1.9% 1.8% 1.2%1.8% 1.2% 1.8%
0.7%
0.9%
1.4%
0.4% 1.5% 7.4% 7.5%
0.5% 1.9% 1.6% 1.8% 1.6% 1.9% 1.7%
1.3% FF 29.17 Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 10 ft. 10 20 10 GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN C-300 SCALE: = PLAN VIEW 1" 10' C-603 A The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 811
SD
6" SD
6" SD
6" SD 4" SD 12"SD BIORETENTION AREA FS 26.50 INV 27.00 TC 30.05 FS 29.55 TC 30.45 FS 29.95 FS 29.17 TC 29.67 FS 29.30 TC 29.45 FS 28.95 TC 29.35 FS 28.85 TC 28.50 FG 26.50 BC 24.00 TC 27.63 FG 26.50 BC 24.00 3:1 2:1 TC 29.20 FS 28.70 TC 30.50 FS 30.00 TOP OF BANK TOE OF BANK FG 28.50 FG 28.55 INV 27.00 INV 27.00 INV 27.00 TC 29.73 FS 29.23 FG 27.40 FG 27.40 GB GB FG 26.50 STUB FOR SILVA CELLS INV 26.85 FG 28.50 SPLASH PAD (TYP) EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION (END) TC 26.50 FG 26.50 BC 24.00 TC 27.33 FG 26.50 BC 24.00 EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION (START) TC 28.50 FG 28.50 FG 28.50 INV 27.43 INV 26.60 RETAINING CURB AT BIORETENTION (ADJACENT TO PROPERTY LINE) - START RETAINING CURB AT BIORETENTION (ADJACENT TO PROPERTY LINE) - END TC 28.50 C-601 4B Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 5 ft. 5 5 10 ALLEY1.9% 7.8% 7.5% 9.7%
9.8% 1.2%
0.2% 0.2% 1.3% 1.8% C-601 3 C-601 3 C-601 4A
GB
GB 5' TAPER C-601 1 C-601 4A 5' TAPER 16 LF 4" SD PIPE, S=0.5%
0.5% 1.6% CONFORM TO EX. GRADE EG 27.60 CONFORM TO EX. GRADE FS 27.13 EG 27.13 TC 28.14 FS 27.64 FS 27.60 TC 28.10 CONFORM TO EX. GRADE EG 27.47 TC 27.96 (STANDARD CURB) STOP ROLLED CURB START ROLLED CURB TC 27.38 (4" ROLLED CURB) TC 28.00 FS 27.50 FS 28.16 FS 28.20 FS 27.62 FS 28.26 FS 28.22 FF 28.32 SEE DETAIL 5 ON SHEET C-601 28 EXTENDED CURB AT PROPERTY LINE (FULL 6" HEIGHT) TC 28.14 FS 27.64 TC 28.14 FS 27.64 TC 28.75 FS 28.25 EG 27.98 TC 28.90 FS 28.40 EG 27.99 EG 28.00 TC 28.40 FS 27.90 EG 27.58 28 STANDARD CURB EXTENDED CURB AT PROPERTY LINE (FULL 6" HEIGHT) INSTALL SD INLET PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 23, "STD. DROP INLET TYPE 1" RIM: 27.23 INV: 25.73 PROPOSED 4"SD PIPE POC TO SILVA CELLS SUBDRAIN INV: 25.65 DETECTABLE WARNING C-603 SURFACE 2 10' 1.8% INV: 27.72 FS 27.96 1.8% TC 28.05 FS 27.55 Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 5 ft. 5 5 10 The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 GRADING ENLARGEMENT C-301 SCALE: = ENLARGEMENT BIORETENTION AREA SCALE: = 1" 5' ENLARGEMENT NORTH PATIO 1" 5' November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 812
6" SS
8" W
6" W
12"SD
12"SD
6" SS
SSCO
SSCO
SSCO
SSCO WV WM WV WM WV SS-LAT SS-LAT
SD HARRINGTON PARK
LAUREL STREET 14 LF 4" SD PIPE 28 LF 4" SD PIPE 27 LF 4" SD PIPE 27 LF 4" SD PIPE 12"SD 12"SD EX. FH ADJUST TO GRADE CONNECT EX. SS MAIN PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 16"STANDARD SEWER LATERAL INV: 24.35± (VIF) EX. SSMH#03 RIM: 27.71 INV: 24.46'± CONNECT EX. WATER MAIN PER CALWATER STD. PROPOSED 50± LF 6" TRENCH DRAIN CONNECT TO PROPOSED SINK POC, SEE PLUMBING PLANS INV: 25.39 CONNECT TO RESTROOM SS POC, SEE PLUMBING PLANS INV: 25.70 CONNECT TO WATER POC, SEE PLUMBING PLANS PROPOSED DOMESTIC 1.5" BFP PER CALWATER STD. INSTALL NEW 2" WATER METER PER CALWATER STD. PROPOSED 1.5" WATER CONNECTION FOR WATER FEATURE (PHASE1B) , STUB FOR FUTURE USE.SEE DETAIL 1, SHEET C-603 PROPOSED 49 LF PVC C900 CLASS 150 12" SD. TRENCH PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 18 "STD. TRENCH DETAIL" EX. SD INLET. RIM: 29.60 INV: 26.68 EX. SD INLET. RIM: 29.20 INV: 26.77± CONNECT TO FILTER PUMP POC, SEE PLUMBING PLANS CONNECT TO FILTER PUMP POC, SEE PLUMBING PLANS PROPOSED 1.5" WATER CONNECTION PROPOSED 4"SS (PVC SDR-26) LATERAL, INSTALL PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD DETAIL NO.16, "STANDARD SEWER LATERAL" PROPERTY LINE (TYPICAL) RELOCATE EX. IRRIGATION METER TO THE PROPOSED LOCATION AND CONNECT TO THE PROPOSED 1" IRRIGATION LINE, SEE IRRIGATION PLANS PROPOSED IRRIGATION BFP, SEE IRRIGATION PLAN PROPOSED SSCO INSTALL PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD DETAIL NO.17, "STANDARD SEWER LATERAL CLEANOUT" INV: 26.15 PROPOSED 28 LF PVC C900 CLASS 150 12" SD INSTALL 24" SDMH PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 11 "STD. MANHOLE," DETAIL NO. 12 "STD. CONNECTION TO MANHOLE WALLS," AND DETAIL NO. 14 "STD. MANHOLE COVER AND FRAME." CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL (1) ONE WAY CHECK VALVE OR FLAT GATE ON THE NORTH SIDE PIPE INLET RIM :29.97 INV: 26.59 PROPOSED 6" AREA DRAIN PROPOSED SPLASH PAD (TYP.) INSTALL SD INLET PER CITY OF SAN CARLOS STD. DETAIL NO. 23, "STD. DROP INLET TYPE 1" AND CONNECT TO EX. 12" SD. RIM: 29.43 INV: 26.40 EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION SEE DETAIL 1,SHEET C-602 12" INV: 27.00 CROSSING 6"SD INV : 26.55 1.5" W TOP OF PIPE : 25.55 CROSSING 6"SD INV : 26.55 1.5" (W) TOP OF PIPE : 25.55 PROPOSED 4" AREA DRAIN (TYP.) PROPOSED 4" AREA DRAIN (TYP.) CONNECT EX. WATER MAIN PER CALWATER STD. PROPOSED 62LF, 4" PERF SUBDRAIN PIPE
5.9'
1.25'
4.5'
1.6'
PROPOSED 42LF, 4" PERF SUBDRAIN PIPE PROPOSED 4" SLEEVE PROPOSED 1.5" WATER CONNECTION Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 10 ft. 10 10 20 PROFILE VIEW HARRINGTON PARK STA:1+00 -STA:2+96 20253035 20302+95 2+75 2+50 2+25 2+00 1+75 1+50 1+25 1+00 0+75
PRO MANHOLE
STA: 1+30.51
RIM. 30.08
INV : 26.59
PRO 4" SS PVC SDR-26
PRO 12" SD PVC C900 CLASS 150
CONNECT TO EX.
SS MAIN
STA: 2+90.15
INV. (VIF)
CONNECT TO EX.
WATER MAIN
STA: 2+82.93
SSCO POC
STA: 2+38.37
INV. 25.39
PRO 6" SD
PVC SDR-35
PIPE CROSSING
STA: 1+80.94
INV : 26.86
PRO 6" SD
PVC SDR-35
PIPE CROSSING
STA: 1+65.40
INV : 27.00
BIORETENTION
HEADWALL OUTFALL
INV : 27.00
STA: 1+58.05
PRO WATER
STUB FOR PHASE 1B
STA: 1+32.64
PRO. 1.5" WATER LATERAL
SSCO POC
STA: 2+21.16
INV. 25.70
SSCO POC
STA: 2+06.29
INV. 26.15 PRO 1.5" WATER LATERAL
EX. 6" SS
STA: 1+16.70
INV 23.52 (VIF)
PRO SD INLET
INV (N) : 26.40
INV (W-E) :26.38
STA 0+88.39
PROPERTY LINE
STA: 2+95.00
OFFSET: 0.00 FG EG
2.7'
2.8'
EX. 2" SL
STA: 1+16.37
PROPERTY LINE
STA: 1+30.00
OFFSET: 0.00
CONFORM TO
EX. GRADE
STA: 1+35.16
PRO AREA DRAIN
STA: 2+49.11
GRATE : 27.88
INV : 26.71
PRO AREA DRAIN
STA: 2+07.90
GRATE 28.99
INV 27.35
PRO SD INLET
STA: 2+75.60
RIM: 27.23
INV 25.73
PRO 4" POC SILVA CELLS
STA: 2+60.20
INV 25.65 PRO 4"SD PVC SDR-35 PVC SDR-35 PRO 4"SD PRO 4"SD PVC
PRO AREA DRAIN
POC TO 4" SD FROM
SILVA CELLS
STA: 2+29.82
GRATE : 27.88
INV 26.62
PRO OUTFALL AT
BIORETENTION
INV 26.60
PRO AREA DRAIN
STA: 1+81.03
GRATE 29.50
INV 27.21
PRO AREA DRAIN
STA: 1+46.42
GRATE 29.98
INV 27.35
CONFROM TO
EX. GRADE
STA: 2+75.42
90° HORIZONTAL
BEND
STA: 2+62.16
4" SLEEVE
STA: 2+57.82
4" SLEEVE
STA: 2+51.45
W POC
STA: 2+39.89
W POC
STA: 2+25.26
45° HORIZONTAL
BEND
STA: 2+15.75
W POC
STA: 2+08.94
W POC
90°HORIZONTAL
BEND 6' FROM POC
STA: 2+34.21
9"
PRO W VALVE
STA: 2+81.45
PRO W METER
STA: 2+76.02
POC BFP
UPSTREAM STA:2+67.59
DOWNSTREAM STA: 2+63
45°HORIZONTAL BEND
STA: 1+45.00
45°HORIZONTAL BEND
STA: 1+36.44
PRO W VALVE
STA: 1+33.59 SDR-35
POC TRENCH DRAIN
STA: 2+21.88
INV 27.43
PRO OUTFALL AT
BIORETENTION
INV 27.00
PRO 6"SD PVC SDR-35
(VIF) UTILITY PLAN & PROFILE C-400 SCALE: = PLAN VIEW 1" 10' The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 813
SD
12"SD
12"SD
12"SD HARRINGTON PARK
LAUREL STREET
6"SD
6"SD
6"SD 4"SD 12"SD BIORETENTION AREA 1A 4"SD 4"SD 4"SD 4"SD 4"SD 4"SD 4"SD Graphic Scale (in feet) 0 1 inch = 10 ft. 10 10 20 The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 LEGEND EXISTING PROPOSED PROPERTY LINE DMA BOUNDARY STORM DRAIN TRENCH DRAIN BIORETENTION AREA PLANTER/LANDSCAPE STORM DRAIN MANHOLE STORM DRAIN INLET TENTATIVE SPOT ARROW OVERLAND FLOW X" SD X" SD STORMWATER CONTROL PLAN C-500 SD November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 814
-B-C-D A- 6 C-601 BIORETENTION AREA STORM DRAIN TRENCH DRAIN EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION AREA EXISTING BUILDING 765 LAUREL ST. FS 26.50 FS 28.50 SPLASH PAD (TYP.) LENGTH PER PLANS TC TC MIN.
24" 18" MIN. 12" MIN. TSL TGL BGL 4' 3' BC 12" MIN. CLASS 2 PERMEABLE MATERIAL FINISHED GRADE NATIVE SOIL. NO COMPACTION. RIP TO LOOSEN. FINISHED GRADE CONCRETE SPLASH PAD: 2' WIDE 3' LONG 3" DEEP STORM DRAIN STORM DRAIN CURB PENETRATION, SEE DETAIL 1 ON SHEET C-602 RETAINING CURB, SEE DETAIL 2 ON SHEET C-601 CURB PENETRATION, SEE DETAIL 1 ON SHEET C-602 CURB PENETRATION, SEE DETAIL 1 ON SHEET C-602 RETAINING CURB, SEE DETAIL 2 ON SHEET C-601 TRENCH DRAIN INV 27.00 EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION TC 29.0 FS 26.50 3:1 FS 28.50 18" BIORETENTION SOIL 6" 4' 2.5' SLOPE TCFG BC 5' BIORETENTION 2' RETAINING CURB, SEE DETAIL 2 ON SHEET C-601 FS 26.50 NATIVE SOIL. NO COMPACTION. RIP TO LOOSENFINISHED GRADE NO. 4 REBAR @ 12" O.C. E.W. LANDSCAPE EG = 28.00 RETAINING CURB AT BIORETENTION AREA (ADJACENT TO PROPERTY LINE) TC= 28.50 EXISTING NATIVE SOIL PROPOSED BOTTOM OF FOOTING TO BE AT 25.00 BOTTOM OF EXISTING BUILDING FOUNDATION AT 25.00 18" BIORETENTION SOIL EXISTING BUILDING FOUNDATION AREA OF INFLUENCE INSTALL 10 ML IMPERMEABLE PLASTIC LINER AT 1:1 SLOPE 1:1 #5 REBAR @ 12" (AT BACK) WALKWAY FS 28.50 12" CLASS II PERMEABLE #4 REBAR @ 12" (TYPICAL) EXISTING BUILDING #4 REBAR @ 12" (TYPICAL) #5 REBAR @ 12" (AT TOP) 6" 5' 4' BIORETENTION NO. 4 REBAR, W/ 90° HOOKS @ ENDS (TYP) TC 6" RETAINING CURB AT BIORETENTION TCBC FG 2' RETAINING CURB, SEE DETAIL 2 ON SHEET C-601 NATIVE SOIL. NO COMPACTION. RIP TO LOOSEN FINISHED GRADE ISOLATION JOINT NO. 4 REBAR @ 12" O.C. E.W. (TYP) 12" STORM DRAIN INV 27.00 FS 26.50 LANDSCAPE EX. FOUNDATION AREA OF INFLUENCE INSTALL 10 ML IMPERMEABLE PLASTIC LINER ALONG SLOPE WALKWAY FS 28.50 FS 29.45 EXISTING BUILDING EXISTING NATIVE SOIL PROPOSED BOTTOM OF FOOTING TO BE AT 25.00 BOTTOM OF EXISTING BUILDING FOUNDATION AT 25.00 #4 REBAR @ 12" (TYPICAL) #5 REBAR @ 12" (AT TOP) #5 REBAR @ 12" (AT BACK) 12" CLASS II PERMEABLE 6" 7' TC2.5' RETAINING CURB, SEE DETAIL 2 ON SHEET C-601 NATIVE SOIL. NO COMPACTION. RIP TO LOOSEN FINISHED GRADE ISOLATION JOINT EXISITING BUILDING LANDSCAPE12" STORM DRAIN EXTENDED CURB AT PROPERTY LINE, SEE DETAIL 4 ON SHEET C-601, SEE NOTE 1 EX. FOUNDATION AREA OF INFLUENCE BOTTOM OF EX. BUILDING FOUNDATION AT 25.00 WALKWAY FS 28.50 FS 29.90 The City of Good Living CITY OF SAN CARLOS CAL I FORN I A DOWNTOWN PLAN IMPLEMENTATION PHASE IA - HARRINGTON PARK CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION CIVIL ENGINEER CSWST2 504 REDWOOD BLVD, STE 310, NOVATO, CA 94947 415.883.9850 ARCHITECT WARE ASSOCIATES 440 GRAND AVE, STE 250 OAKLAND, CA 94610 510.992.9888 WARE-ARCHITECTS.COM ELECTRICAL ENGINEER AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS 404 W FRANKLIN ST, STE 100, MONTEREY, CA 93940 831.646.3336 WATER FEATURE FLUIDITY DESIGN 724 S SPRING ST #1401, LOS ANGELES, CA 90014 213.739.9291 IRRIGATION DESIGN RMA 2670 CAMINO DIABLO, WALNUT CREEK, CA 94597 925.939.3985 LIGHTING DESIGN HLB LIGHTING 785 MARKET ST, STE 800, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94103 415.348.8273 AUDIOVISUAL SALTER 130 SUTTER ST, FLOOR 5, SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94104 415.397.0442 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC 120 2ND ST, 3RD FLOOR SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94105 415.575.4722 WRTDESIGN.COM OWNER CITY OF SAN CARLOS 600 ELM STREET SAN CARLOS, CA 94070 650.802.4264 DATE: 10/30/25 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: Sheet Title: Sheet # REVISIONS DATE 75% SUBMITTAL / BUILDING PERMIT 09/10/25 CANOPY/PAVILION STRUCTURAL ENGINEER STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA INC. 2225 N. 56TH STREET SEATTLE, WA 98103 100% SUBMITTAL / BID SET 10/30/25 DETAILS & SECTIONS C-600 SCALE: = PLAN VIEW 1" 4' SCALE: = SECTION A 1" 2' SCALE: = SECTION C 1" 2' SCALE: = SECTION B 1" 2' SCALE: = SECTION D 1" 2' NOTES: 1. WHEN EXTENDED CURB AT PROPERTY LINE AND EXTENDED CURB AT BIORETENTION ARE LOCATED ADJACENT TO AN EXISTING BUILDING, THE CURB SHALL NOT EXTEND TO A DEPTH BEYOND THE BOTTOM OF THE BUILDING FOUNDATION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE THE DEPTH OF THE EXISTING BUILDING FOUNDATION PRIOR TO COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION OF THE CURB AND NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY CONDITIONS THAT DIFFER FROM THESE DETAILS. 3. FOR GRADES,TC, FS, SD PIPE INFO SEE CIVIL PLANS.